WO1999031560A2 - Digitally controlled illumination methods and systems - Google Patents

Digitally controlled illumination methods and systems Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO1999031560A2
WO1999031560A2 PCT/US1998/026853 US9826853W WO9931560A2 WO 1999031560 A2 WO1999031560 A2 WO 1999031560A2 US 9826853 W US9826853 W US 9826853W WO 9931560 A2 WO9931560 A2 WO 9931560A2
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
signal
light
leds
led
illumination
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/US1998/026853
Other languages
French (fr)
Other versions
WO1999031560A3 (en
WO1999031560A8 (en
Inventor
George G. Mueller
Ihor A. Lys
Frederick Marshall Morgan
Michael K. Blackwell
Original Assignee
Color Kinetics Incorporated
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Priority claimed from PCT/US1998/017702 external-priority patent/WO1999010867A1/en
Application filed by Color Kinetics Incorporated filed Critical Color Kinetics Incorporated
Priority to AU19241/99A priority Critical patent/AU1924199A/en
Priority to ES98964035.4T priority patent/ES2666995T3/en
Priority to JP2000539392A priority patent/JP4718008B2/en
Priority to CA002314163A priority patent/CA2314163C/en
Priority to EP98964035.4A priority patent/EP1040398B1/en
Publication of WO1999031560A2 publication Critical patent/WO1999031560A2/en
Publication of WO1999031560A3 publication Critical patent/WO1999031560A3/en
Publication of WO1999031560A8 publication Critical patent/WO1999031560A8/en
Priority to US10/163,164 priority patent/US7231060B2/en

Links

Classifications

    • HELECTRICITY
    • H05ELECTRIC TECHNIQUES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • H05BELECTRIC HEATING; ELECTRIC LIGHT SOURCES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; CIRCUIT ARRANGEMENTS FOR ELECTRIC LIGHT SOURCES, IN GENERAL
    • H05B45/00Circuit arrangements for operating light-emitting diodes [LED]
    • H05B45/20Controlling the colour of the light
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H05ELECTRIC TECHNIQUES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • H05BELECTRIC HEATING; ELECTRIC LIGHT SOURCES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; CIRCUIT ARRANGEMENTS FOR ELECTRIC LIGHT SOURCES, IN GENERAL
    • H05B45/00Circuit arrangements for operating light-emitting diodes [LED]
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H05ELECTRIC TECHNIQUES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • H05BELECTRIC HEATING; ELECTRIC LIGHT SOURCES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; CIRCUIT ARRANGEMENTS FOR ELECTRIC LIGHT SOURCES, IN GENERAL
    • H05B45/00Circuit arrangements for operating light-emitting diodes [LED]
    • H05B45/30Driver circuits
    • H05B45/37Converter circuits
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H05ELECTRIC TECHNIQUES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • H05BELECTRIC HEATING; ELECTRIC LIGHT SOURCES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; CIRCUIT ARRANGEMENTS FOR ELECTRIC LIGHT SOURCES, IN GENERAL
    • H05B45/00Circuit arrangements for operating light-emitting diodes [LED]
    • H05B45/30Driver circuits
    • H05B45/37Converter circuits
    • H05B45/3725Switched mode power supply [SMPS]
    • H05B45/38Switched mode power supply [SMPS] using boost topology
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H05ELECTRIC TECHNIQUES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • H05BELECTRIC HEATING; ELECTRIC LIGHT SOURCES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; CIRCUIT ARRANGEMENTS FOR ELECTRIC LIGHT SOURCES, IN GENERAL
    • H05B45/00Circuit arrangements for operating light-emitting diodes [LED]
    • H05B45/30Driver circuits
    • H05B45/32Pulse-control circuits
    • H05B45/325Pulse-width modulation [PWM]
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H05ELECTRIC TECHNIQUES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • H05BELECTRIC HEATING; ELECTRIC LIGHT SOURCES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; CIRCUIT ARRANGEMENTS FOR ELECTRIC LIGHT SOURCES, IN GENERAL
    • H05B45/00Circuit arrangements for operating light-emitting diodes [LED]
    • H05B45/30Driver circuits
    • H05B45/345Current stabilisation; Maintaining constant current
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H05ELECTRIC TECHNIQUES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • H05BELECTRIC HEATING; ELECTRIC LIGHT SOURCES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; CIRCUIT ARRANGEMENTS FOR ELECTRIC LIGHT SOURCES, IN GENERAL
    • H05B45/00Circuit arrangements for operating light-emitting diodes [LED]
    • H05B45/30Driver circuits
    • H05B45/395Linear regulators
    • H05B45/397Current mirror circuits

Definitions

  • Light emitting diodes are known which, when disposed on a circuit, accept
  • LEDs are
  • LEDs include air gap LEDs, GaAs light-emitting diodes
  • LEDs single-diode package
  • polymer LEDs polymer LEDs
  • semi-conductor LEDs among others.
  • LEDs in current use are red.
  • Conventional uses for LEDs include displays for low light
  • LEDs digital display of a wristwatch. Improved LEDs have recently been used in arrays for longer- lasting traffic lights. LEDs have been used in scoreboards and other displays. Also, LEDs
  • LEDs may take any color; moreover, a single LED may be designed to
  • the present invention takes
  • LEDS diodes
  • primary colors encompasses any different colors that can be combined to
  • Patent No. 5, 184,1 14, issued to Brown shows an LED display system.
  • Illumination systems exist in which a network of individual lights is controlled by a
  • central driver which may be a computer-controlled driver.
  • illumination systems may be a computer-controlled driver.
  • the DMX-512 protocol was originally designed to standardize the control of light
  • the DMX-512 protocol is a multiplexed digital lighting control
  • non-dim relays parameters of a moving light, or a graphical light in a computerized virtual
  • DMX-512 is used for control for a network of devices.
  • a receiving device such as a dimmer transforms these codes into a function
  • the device will perform the desired task.
  • DMX-512 protocol information is transferred between devices
  • the first wire is referred to as a data + wire
  • the second wire is referred to as a data - wire.
  • the voltage used on the line is typically positive five volts.
  • the data + wire is taken to positive five volts
  • RS-485 is generally understood to be better for data transmission than RS-232.
  • RS-232 With RS-232,
  • the receiver has to measure if the incoming voltage is positive or negative.
  • the two wires over which RS-485 is transmitted are preferably twisted. Twisting
  • RS-485 also increases the maximum data rate, i.e., the maximum amount
  • DMX-512 (using RS-485) permits
  • one start bit which is used to warn the receiver that the next character is starting
  • eight data bits this conveys up to two hundred fifty six different levels
  • two stop bits which are
  • the receiver looks at the two incoming signals on a pair of pins and compares the
  • the signal driver sends five hundred twelve device codes in a continual, repetitive stream of data.
  • the receiving device is addressed with a number between one and five hundred
  • a terminator resistor is typically installed at the end of a DMX line of devices, which
  • the value of the resistor is determined by the cable type used. Some devices allow for self
  • This device creates a physical break in the line by transforming the electrical
  • DMX messages are typically generated through computer software. Each DMX
  • break is a signal for the receiver that the previous message has ended and the next message is about to start.
  • the signal can be more than eighty-eight micro seconds. After the break
  • This start character may be used to
  • the disadvantage is a reduction in the number of messages
  • Each of these characters may have a
  • make after break time and may have a refresh rate of seventy or eighty messages per second.
  • Certain devices are capable of using sixteen-bit DMX. Normal eight bit
  • one set of wires is needed for electrical power, while a second set of
  • wires is needed for data, such as DMX-512 protocol data. Accordingly, the owner of an existing set of lights must undertake significant effort to rewire in order to have a digitally
  • LED based lights are appropriate
  • incandescent lamps or halogen lamps may be more appropriate
  • pulse width modulated signals to control electrical devices, such as motors.
  • microprocessor receives periodic interrupts at a known rate. Each time through the interrupt
  • the processor uses the hardware timer to generate a periodic
  • the difficulty with the third method is that for multiple PWM channels
  • the present invention is an
  • a current control for a lighting assembly which may be an
  • LED system or LED lighting assembly which may be a pulse width modulated (“PWM)
  • PWM pulse width modulated
  • each current-controlled unit is uniquely addressable and capable of receiving illumination color information on a computer lighting
  • current control means PWM current control, analog current
  • control digital current control
  • any other method or system for controlling current any other method or system for controlling current.
  • LED system means any system that is capable of receiving
  • LED system should be understood to include light emitting diodes of all types, light emitting
  • an "LED system” may be any one of electro-luminescent strips, and other such systems.
  • an "LED system” may be any one of electro-luminescent strips, and other such systems.
  • an "LED system” may be any one of electro-luminescent strips, and other such systems.
  • an "LED system” may be any one of electro-luminescent strips, and other such systems.
  • an "LED system” may be any one of electro-luminescent strips, and other such systems.
  • LED system is one type of illumination source. As used herein "illumination
  • illumination source should be understood to include all illumination sources, including LED systems, as
  • incandescent sources including filament lamps, pyro-luminescent sources, such as
  • candle-luminescent sources such as gas mantles and carbon arch radiation sources, as
  • photo-luminescent sources including gaseous discharges, flourescent sources,
  • electro-luminescent sources such as electro-luminescent
  • lamps, light emitting diodes, and cathode luminescent sources using electronic satiation as
  • miscellaneous luminescent sources including galvano-luminescent sources, crystallo-
  • luminescent sources kine-luminescent sources, thermo-luminescent sources, triboluminescent
  • Illumination sources may also include luminescent polymers capable of producing primary colors.
  • the invention includes a tree network configuration of
  • the present invention comprises a heat
  • dissipating housing made out of a heat-conductive material, for housing the lighting assembly.
  • the heat dissipating housing contains two stacked circuit boards holding respectively a power
  • the LED board is thermally connected to
  • the light module is adapted to be conveniently interchanged with other light modules having
  • organic LEDs may include organic LEDs, electro-luminescent strips, and other modules, in addition to
  • LED lighting network which may be an LED lighting network.
  • LED lighting network Disclosed herein is a LED lighting network
  • a heat-dissipating housing to contain the lighting units of the lighting network.
  • thermometer general environmental indicator and lightbulb, all utilizing the general computer
  • the present invention provides applications for digitally controlled LED based lights.
  • Systems and methods of the present invention include uses of such lights in a number of
  • present invention include systems whereby such lights may be made responsive to a variety of
  • Systems and methods of the present invention include improved data and
  • Systems and methods of the present invention include use of LEDs as part of or on a wide range of items to provide aesthetically appealing or function effects.
  • LEDs controlled light emitting diodes
  • Fig. 1 depicts a light module of the present invention.
  • Fig. 2 depicts a light module of Fig. 1 in data connection with a generator of control
  • Fig. 3 depicts a schematic of an embodiment of light module.
  • Fig. 4 depicts an array of LEDs in an embodiment of a light module.
  • Fig. 5 depicts a power module in an embodiment of the invention.
  • Fig. 6 depicts a circuit design for an embodiment of a light module.
  • Fig. 7 depicts a circuit design for an array of LEDs in a light module in an embodiment of the invention.
  • Fig. 8 depicts an array of LEDs that may be associated with a circuit such as that of
  • Fig. 9 depicts a schematic of the electrical design of an embodiment of a light module.
  • Fig. 10 depicts a power module for a light module of the invention.
  • Fig. 11 depicts another view of the power module of Fig. 10.
  • Fig. 12 depicts a circuit for a power supply for a light module of the invention.
  • Fig. 13 depicts a circuit for a power/data multiplexor.
  • Fig. 14 depicts a circuit for another embodiment of a power/data multiplexor.
  • Fig. 15 depicts flow charts depicting steps in a modified pulse width modulation
  • Fig 16 depicts a data delivery track lighting system
  • Fig 17 depicts a circuit design for a data driver for the track system of Fig 16
  • Fig 18 depicts a circuit design for a terminator for a track system of Fig 16
  • Fig 19 depicts an embodiment of a light module in which a cylindrical housing houses the light module
  • Fig 20 depicts a modular light module
  • Fig 21 depicts a modular light module constructed to fit a halogen socket
  • Fig 22 depicts a circuit design for an embodiment of a light module
  • Fig 23 depicts a modular housing for a light module
  • Fig 24 is a schematic illustration of a modular LED unit in accordance with one
  • Fig 25 illustrates a light module in accordance with one embodiment of the present invention
  • Fig 26 illustrates a light module in accordance with another embodiment of the present invention
  • Fig 27 illustrates a light module in accordance with a further embodiment of the
  • Figs 28A-C illustrate a plurality of LEDs arranged within the various configurations
  • Figs 29-68 illustrate the various environments within which the modular LED unit of
  • the present invention may illuminate
  • Fig 69 depicts a smart light bulb embodiment of the invention
  • Fig 70 depicts the embodiment of Fig 69 in data connection with another device
  • Fig 71 depicts the embodiment of Fig 69 in connection with other smart light bulbs
  • Fig. 72 depicts a network of smart light bulbs in data connection with each other.
  • Fig. 73 depicts a light buffer sensor/feedback application using a smart light bulb.
  • Fig. 74 depicts an EKG sensor/feedback environment using a smart light bulb.
  • Fig. 75 depicts a schematic diagram of a sensor/feedback application.
  • Fig. 76 depicts a general block diagram relevant to a color thermometer.
  • Fig. 77 depicts a color speedometer.
  • Fig. 78 depicts a color inclinometer.
  • Fig. 79 depicts a color magnometer.
  • Fig. 80 depicts a smoke alert system.
  • Fig. 81 depicts a color pH meter.
  • Fig. 82 depicts a security system to indicate the presence of an object.
  • Fig. 83 depicts an electromagnetic radiation detector.
  • Fig. 84 depicts a color telephone indicator.
  • Fig. 85 depicts a lighting system using a light module of the present invention.
  • Fig. 86 depicts a schematic of the system of Fig. 85.
  • Fig. 87 depicts a schematic of an encoder for the system of Fig. 85.
  • Fig. 88 depicts a schematic of an encoding method using the encoder of Fig. 87.
  • Fig. 89 depicts a schematic of a decoder of the system of Fig. 85.
  • Fig. 90A depicts an embodiment of a system for precision illumination.
  • Fig. 90B depicts a block diagram of a control module for the precision illumination
  • Fig. 91 depicts an embodiment comprising a precision illumination system held in an
  • Fig 92A depicts fruit-bearing plants illuminated by an array of LED systems
  • Fig 92B depicts fruit-bea ⁇ ng plants illuminated by natural light
  • Fig 93 A is a generally schematic view illustrating the anatomy of the porta hepatis as
  • Fig 93B depicts an embodiment of an LED system affixed to a medical instrument
  • Fig 93C depicts an embodiment of an LED system affixed to an endoscope
  • Fig 93 D depicts an embodiment of an LED system affixed to a surgical headlamp
  • Fig 93E depicts an embodiment of an LED system affixed to surgical loupes
  • Fig 94 depicts a method for treating a medical condition by illuminating with an
  • Fig 95 depicts changing the perceived color of colored objects by changing the color
  • Fig 96 depicts creating an illusion of motion in a colored design by changing the color
  • Fig 97 depicts a vending machine in which an illusion of motion in a colored design is
  • Fig 98 depicts a vending machine in which objects appear and disappear in a colored
  • Fig 99 depicts a system for illuminating a container
  • Fig 100 depicts an article of clothing lit by an LED system
  • a light module 100 is depicted in block diagram format.
  • module 100 includes two components, a processor 16 and an LED system 120, which is
  • Fig. 1 depicted in Fig. 1 as an array of light emitting diodes.
  • processor is used herein to
  • the LED system 120 is
  • the processor 16 controls the processor 16 to produce controlled illumination.
  • the processor 16 controls the processor 16 to produce controlled illumination.
  • the processor 16 controls the processor 16 to produce controlled illumination.
  • the module 100 may be made capable of receiving power and data.
  • the light module 100 may be made capable of receiving power and data.
  • the light module 100 may be constructed to be used either alone or
  • modules 100 can be provided with a data connection 500 to one or more external devices, or,
  • data connection should be understood to encompass any system for delivering data
  • a network such as a network, a data bus, a wire, a transmitter and receiver, a circuit, a video tape, a
  • a data connection may thus include any system of method to deliver data by radio frequency, ultrasonic, auditory, infrared, optical, microwave, laser, electromagnetic, or other transmission
  • the light module 100 may be equipped with a transmitter
  • the processor 16 may be programmed to
  • the light modules 100 may
  • a transmitter 502 which may be a
  • the transmitter 502 should be understood to
  • transmitter 502 may be linked to or be part of a control device 504 that generates control data
  • control device 504 is a computer, such as a laptop computer.
  • the control data may be in any form suitable
  • control data is formatted according to the DMX-512 protocol, and conventional
  • control device 504 to control the light modules 100.
  • the light module 100 may also be
  • module 100 may act in stand alone mode according to pre-programmed instructions.
  • Fig. 3 shown is an electrical schematic representation of the light module
  • Figs. 4 and 5 show the LED-containing side
  • Light module 100 may be constructed, in an embodiment, as a self-contained module that is configured to be a standard item interchangeable with any similarly constructed light module.
  • Light module 100 contains a ten-pin electrical connector 1 10 of the general type. In this
  • the connector 1 10 contains male pins adapted to fit into a complementary ten-pin
  • Pin 180 is the power supply.
  • LED light emitting diode
  • LED system 120 includes a set 121 of red LEDs, a set 140 of blue LEDs, and a set
  • the LEDs may be conventional LEDs, such those obtainable from the
  • LED system 120 includes LED set 121, which contains three parallel connected rows of nine
  • red LEDs (not shown), as well as LED sets 140 and 160, which each contain five parallel
  • each red LED drops the potential in the line by a lower amount
  • each blue or green LED about two and one-tenth V, compared to four volts
  • rows of five blue LEDs in LED set 140 are connected in common, and go to pin 148 on
  • each LED set in the LED system 120 is associated with a programming resistor that combines
  • resistor 122 Between pin 124 and 126 is resistor 122, six and two-tenths ohms. Between pin 144 and 146 is resistor 142, four and seven-tenths ohms. Between pin 164 and 166 is resistor
  • Resistor 122 programs maximum current through red LED
  • resistor 142 programs maximum current through blue LED set 140, and resistor 162
  • a circuit 10 for a digitally controlled LED-based light includes an
  • LED assembly 12 containing LED output channels 14, which are controlled by the processor
  • switch unit 20 containing switches which are connected to individual pins of pin set 21 of processor 16.
  • An oscillator 19 provides a clock signal for the processor 16
  • data and power input unit 18 has four pins
  • a power supply 1 which may be a twenty-four volt LED power supply, a processor
  • power supply 2 which may be a five volt processor power supply, a data in line 3 and a
  • the first power supply 1 provides power to LED channels 14 of LED assembly
  • the second processor power supply 2 may be connected to power supply input 20 of
  • processor 16 to provide operating power for the processor 16 and also may be connected to a
  • the capacitor may be connected between the processor power supply 2 and ground.
  • 3 may be connected to pin 18 of processor 16 and may be used to program and dynamically
  • the ground may be connected to pins 8 and 19 of the processor 16.
  • LED assembly 12 may be supplied with power from the LED power supply 1 and may
  • the LED channel 14 may supply power to at least one LED. As shown in Fig. 1, the LED assembly 12 may supply multiple LED channels
  • each LED channel 14 for different color LEDs (e.g., red, green and blue), with each LED channel 14 individually
  • LEDs 15 may be arrayed in series to receive signals through each
  • LEDs 15 may also be arrayed to receive data according to a protocol
  • the output of the microprocessor appears on pins 12, 13 and 14 of processor 16,
  • pins of processor 16 could be used to control additional LEDs. Likewise, different pins of
  • processor 16 could be used to control the illustrated LEDs 15, provided that appropriate
  • a resistor 28 may be connected between transistor 26 and ground. In the illustrated embodiment
  • resistor 28 associated with the red LED has a resistance value of sixty-two ohms
  • a capacitor 29 may be connected between the first LED power supply 1 and ground.
  • this capacitor has a value of one-tenth of a microfarad.
  • Processor 16 may be connected to an oscillator 19.
  • One acceptable oscillator is a
  • crystal tank circuit oscillator which provides a twenty megaHertz clock. This oscillator may
  • processor 16 is a programmable integrated circuit
  • PIC chip such as a PIC 16C63 or PIC 16C66 manufactured by Microchip Technology, Inc.
  • any processor capable of controlling the LEDs 15 of LED assembly 12 mav be used
  • any processor capable of controlling the LEDs 15 of LED assembly 12 mav be used
  • ASIC application specific integrated circuit
  • a total of eighteen LEDs 15 are
  • the processor 16 can be used to separately control the precise intensity of
  • the user may precisely control the color and intensity of the LED Due to the relatively instantaneous
  • the processor 16 may be controlled by
  • control may be digital, so that precise control is
  • Figs 10 and 1 1 show the power terminal side
  • power module 200 may be self contained Interconnection with a male pin set 110 is achieved through complementary female pin set 210.
  • Pin 280 connects with pin 180 for supplying power, delivered to pin 280 from supply 300.
  • Supply 300 is shown as a functional block for
  • supply 300 can take numerous forms for generating a DC voltage.
  • supply 300 provides twenty-four volts through a connection terminal
  • supply 300 may also supply a DC voltage after
  • pin connector 210 Also connected to pin connector 210 are three current programming integrated
  • ICR 220 may be a three terminal adjustable
  • Each regulator contains an input terminal, an output terminal and an
  • the regulators function to maintain a
  • Pin 228 in the power module is coupled to pin 128 in the
  • resistor 122 is ordinarily disposed between the output and adjustment terminals of ICR
  • resistor 122 programs the amount of current regulated by ICR 220. Eventually, the current output from the adjustment terminal of ICR 220 enters a Darlington driver. In this way, ICR 220 and associated resistor 122 program the maximum
  • the red, blue and green LED currents enter another integrated circuit, ICI 380, at
  • ICI 380 may be a high current/voltage Darlington driver
  • ICI 380 may be used as a current sink, and may function to switch current
  • ICI contains six sets of Darlington transistors with
  • nodes 324, 344 and 364 couple the current
  • each of the three on-board Darlington pairs is used in the following manner as a switch.
  • the base of each Darlington pair is used in the following manner as a switch.
  • input 424 is the signal input
  • Input 444 is the signal
  • Input 464 is the
  • microcontroller IC2 400 as described below. In essence, when a high frequency square wave
  • ICI 380 switches current through a respective node
  • microcontroller IC2 400 in the embodiment of Fig. 9
  • Microcontroller IC2 400 is preferably a MICROCHIP brand
  • microcontroller IC2 performs the software functions described herein.
  • the main function of microcontroller IC2 performs the software functions described herein.
  • the main function of microcontroller IC2 performs the software functions described herein.
  • microcontroller IC2 400 is partially
  • Microcontroller IC2 400 is powered through pin 450, which is coupled to a five volt
  • Source 700 is preferably driven from supply 300 through a coupling
  • An exemplary voltage regulator is
  • microcontroller IC2 400 The clock frequency of microcontroller IC2 400 is set by crystal 480,
  • Pin 490 is the microcontroller IC2 400 ground reference.
  • Switch 600 is a twelve position dip switch that may be alterably and mechanically set
  • microcontroller IC2 400 "knows" its unique address ("who am
  • network protocol such as a DMX protocol
  • DMX DMX protocol
  • microcontroller IC2 400 individually addressed microcontroller IC2 400 from a central network controller (not shown).
  • the DMX protocol is described in a United States Theatre Technology, Inc. publication
  • controller (not shown) creates a stream of network data consisting of sequential data packets.
  • Each packet first contains a header, which is checked for conformance to the standard and discarded, followed by a stream of sequential characters representing data for sequentially
  • Each character corresponds to a decimal number zero to two hundred fifty-five
  • the refresh cycle is defined by the standard to be a minimum of one thousand
  • Microcontroller IC2 400 is programmed continually to "listen" for its data stream
  • microcontroller IC2 400 When microcontroller IC2 400 is "listening,” but before it detects a data packet intended for it,
  • each register can take on a value from zero to two hundred fifty five, these values create two
  • PWM pulse width modulation
  • the PWM interrupt routine is implemented using a
  • microcontroller IC2 400 When microcontroller IC2 400 receives new data, it freezes the counter, copies the
  • intensity values may be updated in the middle of the PWM cycle. Freezing the counter
  • each lighting unit to quickly pulse/strobe as a strobe light does. Such strobing happens when
  • the central controller sends network data having high intensity values alternately with network data having zero intensity values at a rapid rate. If one restarted the counter without first
  • LEDS unlike incandescent elements
  • the central controller can send a continuous dimming signal
  • red register is set at 4 and the counter is set at 3 when it is frozen. Here, the counter is frozen
  • the network data changes the value in the red register from four to two and the counter is
  • microprocessors that provide the digital control functions of the LEDs of the
  • present invention may be responsive to any electrical signal; that is, external signals may be used to direct the microprocessors to control the LEDs in a desired manner.
  • a computer may be responsive to any electrical signal; that is, external signals may be used to direct the microprocessors to control the LEDs in a desired manner.
  • program may control such signals, so that a programmed response to given input signals is
  • signals may be generated that turn individual LEDs on and off, that vary the
  • predetermined intervals that are controllable to very short time intervals, and that vary the
  • Input signals can range from simple on-off or intensity signals, such as that from a
  • detectors such as detectors of
  • Jack 800 is used as an input jack, and is shown for
  • IC3 500 which is an RS-485/RS-422 differential bus repeater of the standard type
  • DS96177 from the National Semiconductor Corporation, Santa Clara, California.
  • inputs 860, 870 enter IC3 500 at pins 560, 570.
  • the data signal is passed through from pin
  • Jack 900 is used as an output jack and is shown for
  • signal outputs 960, 970, 980, 990 and ground 950 are simplified as having only five outputs: signal outputs 960, 970, 980, 990 and ground 950.
  • Outputs 960 and 970 are split directly from input lines 860 and 870, respectively.
  • Outputs 980 and 990 come directly from IC3 500 pins 580 and 590, respectively. It will be
  • a network may be constructed as a daisy chain, if only
  • illumination or display units can be constructed from a collection of power modules each
  • any illumination or display color may be generated simply by preselecting the light intensity
  • each color LED emits. Further, each color LED can emit light at any of 255 different
  • the maximum intensity can be
  • modules of different maximum current ratings may thereby be conveniently interchanged.
  • a special power supply module 38 is
  • the power supply module 38 may be disposed on any combination of
  • platform of the light module 100 such as, for example, the platform of the embodiment
  • the output of the power supply module 38 supplies power to a
  • power supply module 38 is capable of taking a voltage or current input in a variety of forms
  • the power supply module includes inputs 40, which
  • rectifying element 42 which in an embodiment of the
  • the invention is a bridge rectifier consisting of four diodes 44.
  • the rectifying element 42 rectifies
  • a storage element 48 which may include one or more capacitors 50.
  • the storage element stores power that is supplied by the rectifying element 42, so that the power
  • supply module 38 can supply power to the input 18 of the circuit 10 of Fig. 6, even if power to
  • the input 40 of the power supply module 38 is intermittent.
  • the capacitors is an electrolytic capacitor with a value of three hundred thirty microfarads.
  • the power supply module 38 may further include a boost converter 52.
  • the boost may be further included.
  • the boost converter 52 may include an inductor 54, a controller 58, one or more capacitors 60, one or more resistors 62,
  • the resistors limit the data voltage excursions in the signal to the
  • the controller 58 may be a conventional controller suitable for
  • boost conversion such as the LTC1372 controller provided by Linear Technology
  • the boost converter 52 is capable of taking power at
  • a separate data wire may provide data to control the LEDs 15, if the platform 30 is inserted into a
  • the device which may be a lighting device such as the LED-based lighting device of Fig. 1 or
  • Electrical power and data may be any other device that requires both electrical power and data. Electrical power and
  • data may be supplied to multiple lighting devices on a single pair of wires.
  • power is delivered to the device (and, where applicable, through
  • the power supply module 38 recovers power from
  • a power data multiplexer 60 is
  • 64 is provided, which may be a line driver or other input for providing data.
  • a line driver or other input for providing data.
  • the data is DMX-512 protocol data for control of lighting, such as LEDs. It
  • power data multiplexer 60 could manipulate data according to
  • the power data multiplexer 60 may include a data input element 68 and a data output
  • the data output element 70 may include an output element 72 that supplies
  • the data input element 68 may include a receiver 74,
  • the data input element 68 may further include a power supply 78 with a voltage regulator 80, for providing regulated power to the
  • the data input element 68 supplies a data signal
  • a TTL data signal is
  • the data output element 70 amplifies the data signal and determines the relative
  • a chip 82 consists of a high
  • zero volts could represent logical zero, with a particular
  • the voltage is sufficient to supply power while maintaining the logical data values of the data stream.
  • the chip 82 may be any conventional chip capable of
  • the device may be a light module 100, such as that depicted in Fig. 1.
  • the data supplied to the power data multiplexer 60 is the data supplied to the power data multiplexer 60
  • the power data multiplexer 60 can amplify the DMX-512 signal from the standard signal voltage and/or
  • the resulting higher power signal from the power data multiplexer 60 can be converted
  • the data stream from the power data multiplexor 60 can be recovered by simple
  • Resistive division can be accomplished by the resistors 84 of Fig. 12.
  • the power data multiplexer 62 when combined with the power supply module 38 and
  • the array 37 mounted on a modular platform 30, permits the installation of LED-based
  • the power data multiplexor 60 can be installed along a conventional data
  • the user can have LED based, digitally controlled lights by
  • the power supply module 38 can be supplied with
  • module can supply the array 37 from alternating current present in conventional fixtures, such
  • FIG. 14 Another embodiment of a power data multiplexor 60 is depicted in Fig. 14. In this embodiment, a power supply of between twelve and twenty-four volts is used, connected to
  • the voltage at 803 is eight volts greater than the supply voltage.
  • the voltage at 805 is
  • the power data multiplexor 60 is about negative eight volts.
  • the voltage at 801 is five volts.
  • a voltage volt difference may include decoupling capacitors 807 and 809 for the input power supply.
  • a voltage volt difference may include decoupling capacitors 807 and 809 for the input power supply.
  • regulator 81 1 creates a clean, five volt supply, decoupled by capacitor 813. A voltage
  • regulator 815 which may be an LM317 voltage regulator available from National
  • LT1375 step down regulator available from Linear Technology of Milpitas CA, operated in the voltage inverting configuration.
  • the teachings of the LT1375 data sheet are
  • resistors 817 and 819 have been selected
  • a diode 844 is a higher voltage version than that indicated in
  • inductor 846 is may be any conventional inductor, for example, one with a
  • Diode 854 may be a plastic
  • a step up voltage regulator 825 which may be an LT1372
  • the step up voltage regulator may be of a standard design.
  • Diode 862 may be a diode with higher voltage than that taught
  • Inductor 864 and capacitor 839 may be sized appropriately according to
  • Capacitor 866 may be sized for frequency
  • Resistors 833 and 837 form a voltage divider, producing a voltage in proportion to the output
  • Resistors 827 and transistors 829 form a current
  • the voltage at feedback pin 835 is thus proportional to the output voltage minus the input
  • resistor 827 for the subtraction to work is chosen to produce eight volts.
  • Capacitors 839 may
  • Incoming data which may be in the form of an incoming RS-485 protocol data stream, is received by a receiver chip 841 at the pins 843 and 845, buffered, and amplified to produce
  • Each of the signals from the pins 853 and 855 is then processed by an output amplifier.
  • cascode type current sources 861 and 863 the first composed of resistor 865 and transistor
  • the current source 863 will sink a current of approximately 20 milliamps when the signal entering the amplifier is low, such as at zero volts, and will sink no
  • 861 will source approximately twenty milliamperes when the signal is high, but not when low.
  • transistors 877 and 885 are connected together, forming a current
  • Transistors 899 and 901 form a bi-directional
  • Class B voltage follower of a standard design and the voltage at the junction of their emitters
  • transistor 901 conducts, causing the voltage at the gates of transistors 903 and 907 to
  • Field effect transistors 903 and 907 which may be of
  • transistor 907 will remain on so long as the input signal remains high.
  • capacitor 893 will charge at the same rate, eventually being clamped to a value of the
  • Transistor 899 will cause the voltage at the gates of transistor
  • Transistor 905 and resistor 911 form a
  • Diode 913 isolates the short circuit protector circuit when transistor 903 is not on.
  • transistor 907 No protection is provided for transistor 907, because the expected short circuit paths would be either to ground or to the other amplifier channel. In the first case no current could flow
  • the circuit of Fig. 14 produces a controlled slew rate; that is, the power and data
  • the controlled slew rate produced by the circuit of Fig 14 decreases the magnitude of the
  • termination is only needed in the case of a device that is commanded to be off, with actual data
  • the method may be accomplished by computer software coding of the steps depicted in the flow charts 202 and
  • the processor schedules an interrupt of at least N
  • this interrupt is
  • step 208 each sub-period's coarse PWM values are computed In step 212, the
  • the first sub-period is one, etc
  • step 214 all PWM signals are updated from pre-computed values corresponding to this specific sub-period. In most cases this entails a single read from an array of pre-computed values, followed by a single write to update the
  • step 218 one of the PWM signals is then modified.
  • the step 218 is accomplished
  • a step 222 the processor advances the sub-period bookkeeping value to point to the
  • the vernier in the step 218 can reduce or increase the amount of time that the PWM
  • each PWM signal can change multiple times per PWM period.
  • the method disclosed thus far consumes a maximum of approximately half of the
  • vernier update need not be known, so long as the time spent between the vernier updates is the
  • periods per PWM cycle can generate non-uniform PWM waveforms at frequencies higher than
  • the microprocessor still executes interrupts at fixed intervals.
  • the software can asynchronously change the duty cycles of the signals produced.
  • This software routine can thus utilize a single timer to generate multiple PWM signals
  • waveform is a non-uniform nine thousand seven hundred sixty-five Hertz signal, with much
  • the LED arrays of the present invention are responsive to external
  • the data connection 500 can be a DMX or lighting data
  • a track capable of delivering data signals may be run inside a track lighting apparatus for LEDs
  • the data signals may then be controlled by a microprocessor to permit
  • present invention to provide distributed lights that are responsive to both electrical and data
  • the LEDs of the present invention are highly responsive to changes the input signal.
  • DMX-512 networks send data at two
  • the present invention may also include an automation system chassis that consists of a
  • mother board that communicates with a network and/or bus using the DMX, Ethernet or other
  • the input signals for the microprocessor can be any suitable input signals for the microprocessor.
  • a switch that is mounted on a wall or a remote control can transmit a
  • Another embodiment provides a different track lighting system. Present track lighting
  • a conventional track lighting system delivers power and provides a
  • a track provides only two conductors, and all fixtures along the
  • the track are controlled by a single control device. It is not possible to control remotely (switch on or off, or dim) a subset of the fixtures attached to the track without affecting the
  • Track systems have generally included more than two conductors, primarily because of
  • a fixture is assigned to a subset at the time of insertion into the track. Thus, that fixture will be affected by signals for the particular subset. If there is
  • the fixture typically only receives power, which can be modified somewhat (i.e.
  • termination devices for ensuring that the signals do not cause excessive spurious reflections.
  • a user may wish to send lighting control data
  • the fixture 6000 could be a light module 100, such as that disclosed herein, or it could be any other conventional fixture capable of connection to a conventional track lighting track.
  • the data control standard is the DMX-512 standard described herein.
  • DMX-512 specifies the use of RS-485 voltage signaling levels and input/output
  • each section cannot be "terminated" with its characteristic impedance to achieve a properly
  • a specialized termination network may be utilized. Certain characteristics of the track system are relevant. First, multiple sections of track
  • the minimum impedance of such loads shall be not less than ten and five-tenths kilo-ohms
  • the total number of fixtures can easily exceed two hundred in just a single room.
  • the track itself may
  • wavelength of the highest frequency signal transmitted on them can be analyzed and viewed as a lumped load; i.e., their transmission line effects can be effectively ignored.
  • the highest frequency signal delivered to it For a digital signal, the highest
  • frequency component is the edge, at which the signal transitions between the two voltage
  • edge transition time required to reliably transmit such a signal is at least five times faster than
  • network length is about forty-two meters. This is an adequate length for most applications.
  • the driver is preferably capable of
  • the driver output current is preferably at least two hundred milliamps to ensure adequate margin.
  • harmonics generated by the system fall well below the thirty megahertz starting frequency for
  • conductors should have a low resistance per unit length, ideally less than that needed to deliver one and one-half volts of signal to all receivers as specified in the RS-485 standard.
  • This termination is preferably not purely resistive
  • Halo Power Track provided by
  • the data can correspond not only to light
  • control effects such as moving a yoke, gobo control, light focus, or the
  • system can be used to control non-lighting devices that are RS-485
  • Units can send status information to the driver, or information can be provided to the
  • a circuit design for the data driver 6004 includes a
  • unregulated power is delivered to the data driver 6004.
  • the power may be split into positive
  • a shunt regulator 6014 consisting of a resistor 6016, a resistor 6018, and a
  • transistor 6020 Decoupling may be provided by capacitors 6022, 6024 and 6028.
  • regulator 6014 may be of a standard design familiar to analog circuit designers.
  • one-half volt supply is further regulated to produce a five volt supply by a voltage regulator 6030, which may be an LM78L05ACM voltage regulator available from National

Abstract

Provided herein are methods and systems for illumination. The methods and systems may include LED systems associated with a processor. Various environments and applications of processor-controlled LED systems are provided, including kinetic illumination, precision illumination, a smart light bulb, a lighting entertainment system, a power/data protocol, a data delivery track, lighting components and sensor/feedback applications.

Description

DIGITALLY CONTROLLED ILLUMINATION METHODS AND SYSTEMS
CROSS REFERENCE TO RELATED APPLICATIONS
This application is a based upon, claims priority to, and incorporates by reference the
entire disclosure of the following patent applications: Multicolored LED Lighting Method
and Apparatus, Patent Cooperation Treaty Application, filed August 26, 1998, PCT App. No.
US98/17702; Digitally Controlled Light Emitting Diode Systems and Methods, United States
provisional patent application number 60/071,281, filed December 17, 1997, naming George
Mueller and Ihor Lys as inventors; Multi-Color Intelligent Lighting, United States provisional
patent application no. 60/068,792, filed December 24, 1997, naming George Mueller and Ihor
Lys as inventors; Digital Lighting Systems, United States provisional patent application no.
60/078,861, filed March 20, 1998, naming Ihor Lys as inventor; System and Method for
Controlled Illumination, United States provisional patent application no. 60/079,285, filed March 25, 1998, naming George Mueller and Ihor Lys as inventors; Method for Software
Driven Generation of Multiple Simultaneous High Speed Pulse Width Modulated Signals,
United States provisional patent application no. 60/090,920, filed June 26, 1998, naming Ihor
Lys as inventor; as well as eight United States patent applications filed on even date herewith,
December 17, 1998, each naming George Mueller and Ihor Lys, application numbers to be
assigned, having the following titles: Smart Light Bulb; Power/Data Protocol;
Sensor/Feedback Illumination Methods and Systems; Precision Illumination Methods and
Systems; Lighting Entertainment System; Kinetic Illumination Systems and Methods;
Illumination Components; and Data Delivery Track. In addition, the entire disclosure of each of the United States patents and patent applications referred to herein
is hereby incorporated by reference.
DESCRIPTION OF THE RELATED ART
Light emitting diodes are known which, when disposed on a circuit, accept
electrical impulses from the circuit .and convert the impulses into light signals. LEDs are
energy efficient, they give off virtually no heat, and they have a long lifetime.
A number of types of LED exist, including air gap LEDs, GaAs light-emitting diodes
(which may be doubled and packaged as single unit offer greater reliability than conventional
single-diode package), polymer LEDs, and semi-conductor LEDs, among others. Most LEDs
in current use are red. Conventional uses for LEDs include displays for low light
environments, such as the flashing light on a modem or other computer component, or the
digital display of a wristwatch. Improved LEDs have recently been used in arrays for longer- lasting traffic lights. LEDs have been used in scoreboards and other displays. Also, LEDs
have been placed in arrays and used as television displays. Although most LEDs in use are
red, yellow or white, LEDs may take any color; moreover, a single LED may be designed to
change colors to any color in the color spectrum in response to changing electrical signals.
It is well known that combining the projected light of one color with the projected light
of another color will result in the creation of a third color. It is also well known that three
commonly used primary colors ~ red, blue and green — can be combined in different
proportions to generate almost any color in the visible spectrum. The present invention takes
advantage of these effects by combining the projected light from at least two light emitting
diodes (LEDS) of different primary colors. It should be understood that for purposes of this
invention the term "primary colors" encompasses any different colors that can be combined to
create other colors. Computer lighting networks that use LEDs are also known. U.S. Patent No
5,420,482, issued to Phares, describes one such network that uses different colored LEDs to
generate a selectable color, primarily for use in a display apparatus. U.S. Patent No
4,845,481, issued to Havel, is directed to a multicolored display device. Havel uses a pulse
width modulated signal to provide current to respective LEDs at a particular duty cycle. U.S.
Patent No. 5, 184,1 14, issued to Brown, shows an LED display system. U.S. Patent No.
5,134,387, issued to Smith et al., is directed to an LED matrix display.
Illumination systems exist in which a network of individual lights is controlled by a
central driver, which may be a computer-controlled driver. Such illumination systems
include theatrical lighting systems. The USITT DMX-512 protocol was developed to
deliver a stream of data from a theatrical console to a series of theatrical lights.
The DMX-512 protocol was originally designed to standardize the control of light
dimmers by lighting consoles. The DMX-512 protocol is a multiplexed digital lighting control
protocol with a signal to control 512 devices, such device including dimmers, scrollers,
non-dim relays, parameters of a moving light, or a graphical light in a computerized virtual
reality set. DMX-512 is used for control for a network of devices. The DMX-512 protocol
employs digital signal codes. When a transmitting device, such as a lighting console, sends
digital codes, a receiving device, such as a dimmer, transforms these codes into a function
command, such as dimming to a specified level. With digital systems, signal integrity is
compromised less over long cable runs, relative to analog control. When a coded string of 0/1
digits are sent and received, the device will perform the desired task.
In hardware terms, DMX-512 protocol information is transferred between devices
over metal wires using the RS-485 hardware protocol. This involves the use of two wires,
known as a twisted pair. The first wire is referred to as a data + wire, and the second wire is referred to as a data - wire. The voltage used on the line is typically positive five volts. By way of example, to transmit a logical one, the data + wire is taken to positive five volts, and
the data - wire to zero volts. To transmit a logical zero, the data + wire goes to zero volts, and
the data - wire to positive five volts. This is quite different from the more common RS-232
interface, where one wire is always kept at zero volts. In RS-232, a logical one is transmitted
by putting between positive six and positive twelve volts on the line, and a logical zero is
transmitted by putting a voltage between negative six and negative twelve volts onto the line.
RS-485 is generally understood to be better for data transmission than RS-232. With RS-232,
the receiver has to measure if the incoming voltage is positive or negative. With RS-485, the
receiver only needs to determine which line has the higher voltage on it.
The two wires over which RS-485 is transmitted are preferably twisted. Twisting
means that disturbances on the line tend to affect both lines simultaneously, more or less by
the same amount, so that the voltage on both lines will fluctuate, but the difference in voltage
between the lines remains the same. The result is that noise is rejected from the line. Also, the drive capability of RS-485 drivers is higher than RS-232 drivers. As a result, the RS-485
protocol can connect devices over distances hundreds of times further than would be possible
when using RS-232. RS-485 also increases the maximum data rate, i.e., the maximum amount
of data which can be transmitted over the line every second. Communication between devices
using RS-232 is normally about nine thousand six hundred baud (bits per second). Faster
communication is possible, but the distances over which data can be transmitted are reduced
significantly if communication is faster. By comparison, DMX-512 (using RS-485) permits
data to be sent at two hundred fifty thousand baud (two hundred fifty thousand bits per
second) over distances of hundreds of meters without problems. Every byte transmitted has
one start bit, which is used to warn the receiver that the next character is starting, eight data bits (this conveys up to two hundred fifty six different levels) and two stop bits, which are
used to tell the receiver that this is the end of the character. This means that every byte is
transmitted as eleven bits, so that the length of each character is forty-four micro seconds.
The receiver looks at the two incoming signals on a pair of pins and compares the
differences. A voltage rise on one wire and the inverse on the other will be seen as a
differential and therefore deciphered as a digit. When both signals are identical, no difference
is recognized and no digit deciphered. If interference was accidently transmitted along the line,
it would impart no response as long as the interference was identical on both lines. The
proximity of the two lines assist in assuring that distribution of interference is identical on both
wires. The signal driver sends five hundred twelve device codes in a continual, repetitive stream of data. The receiving device is addressed with a number between one and five hundred
twelve so it will respond only to data that corresponds to its assigned address.
A terminator resistor is typically installed at the end of a DMX line of devices, which
reduces the possibility of signal reflection which can create errors in the DMX signal. The ohm
value of the resistor is determined by the cable type used. Some devices allow for self
termination at the end of the line. Multiple lines of DMX data can be distributed through an
opto-repeater. This device creates a physical break in the line by transforming the electrical
signals into light which spans a gap, then it is restored to electrical signals. This protects
devices from damaging high voltage, accidentally travelling along the network. It will also
repeat the original DMX data to several output lines. The input data is recreated at the
outputs, eliminating distortion. The signal leaves the opto-repeater as strong as it left the
console.
DMX messages are typically generated through computer software. Each DMX
message is preceded with a "break," which is a signal for the receiver that the previous message has ended and the next message is about to start. The length of the break signal
(equivalent to a logical zero on the line) has to be eighty-eight micro seconds according to the
DMX specification. The signal can be more than eighty-eight micro seconds. After the break
signal is removed from the line, there is a period during which the signal is at a logical one
level. This is known as the "Mark" or 'Mark After Break' (MAB) time. This time is typically at
least eight micro seconds. After the Mark comes the first character, or byte, which is knows as
the "Start" character. This character is rather loosely specified, and is normally set to the value
zero (it can vary between zero and two hundred fifty five). This start character may be used to
specify special messages. It is, for example, possible to have five hundred twelve dimmers
which respond to messages with the start character set to zero, and another five hundred twelve dimmers which respond to messages with the start character set to one. If one
transmits data for these one thousand twenty-four dimmers, and one sets the start character to
zero for the first five hundred twelve dimmers, and to one for the second set of five hundred
twelve dimmers, it is possible to control one thousand twenty four dimmers (or more if one
wishes, using the same technique). The disadvantage is a reduction in the number of messages
sent to each of the set of dimmers, in this example by a factor two. After the start character
there are between one and five hundred twelve characters, which normally correspond to the
up to five hundred twelve channels controlled by DMX. Each of these characters may have a
value between zero (for 'off, zero percent) and two hundred fifty five (for full, one hundred
percent). After the last character there may be another delay (at logic one level) before the
next break starts. The number of messages which are transmitted every second are dependent
on all the parameters listed above. In one case, where the break length is eighty-eight
microseconds, the make after break length is eight micro seconds, and each character takes
exactly forty-four micro seconds to transmit there will be forty-four messages per second, assuming that all five hundred twelve channels are being transmitted. Many lighting desks and
other DMX sources transmit less than five hundred twelve channels, use a longer break and
make after break time, and may have a refresh rate of seventy or eighty messages per second.
Often, there is no benefit to be had from this, as the current value is not necessarily
recalculated for each of the channels in each frame. The 'standard' DMX signal would allow
for a lamp to be switched on and off twenty-two times per second, which is ample for many
applications. Certain devices are capable of using sixteen-bit DMX. Normal eight bit
messages allow two hundred fifty-six positions, which is inadequate for the positioning of
mirrors and other mechanical devices. Having sixteen bits available per channel increases that
quantity up to sixty-five thousand five hundred thirty-six steps, which removes the limitation
of 'standard' DMX.
A significant problem with present lighting networks is that they require special wiring
or cabling. In particular, one set of wires is needed for electrical power, while a second set of
wires is needed for data, such as DMX-512 protocol data. Accordingly, the owner of an existing set of lights must undertake significant effort to rewire in order to have a digitally
controlled lighting environment.
A second significant problem with present lighting networks is that particular lighting
applications require particular lighting types. For example, LED based lights are appropriate
for some applications, while incandescent lamps or halogen lamps may be more appropriate
for other applications. A user who wishes to have a digitally controlled network of lights, in
addition to rewiring, must currently add additional fixtures or replace old fixtures for each
different type of light. Accordingly, a need has arisen for a lighting fixture that permits use of
different types of digitally controlled lights. Use of pulse width modulated signals to control electrical devices, such as motors, is
also known. Traditional methods of providing pulse width modulated signals include
hardware using software programmed timers, which in some instances is not cost effective if
not enough timer modules are available, and one interrupt per count processes, in which a
microprocessor receives periodic interrupts at a known rate. Each time through the interrupt
loop the processor compares the current count with the target counts and updates one or more
output pins, thus creating a pulse width modulated signal, or PWM. In this case, the speed
equals the clock speed divided by cycles in the interrupt routine divided by desired resolution.
In a third method, in a combination of the first two processes, software loops contain a
variable number of instructions. The processor uses the hardware timer to generate a periodic
interrupt, and then, depending on whether the pulse is to be very short or not, either schedules
another interrupt to finish the PWM cycle, or creates the pulse by itself in the first interrupt routine by executing a series of instructions consuming a desired amount of time between two
PWM signal updates. The difficulty with the third method is that for multiple PWM channels
it is very difficult to arrange the timer based signal updates such that they do not overlap, and
then to accurately change the update times for a new value of PWM signals. Accordingly, a
new pulse width modulation method and system is needed to assisting in controlling electrical devices.
Many conventional illumination applications are subject to other drawbacks.
Conventional light sources, such as halogen and incandescent sources may produce
undesirable heat. Such sources may have very limited life spans. Conventional light sources
may require substantial lens and filtering systems in order to produce color. It may be very
difficult to reproduce precise color conditions with conventional light sources. Conventional
light sources may not respond quickly to computer control. One or more of these drawbacks may have particular significance in particular existing lighting applications. Moreover, the
combination of these drawbacks may have prevented the development of a number of other
illumination applications. Accordingly, a need exists for illumination methods and systems that
overcome the drawbacks of conventional illumination systems and that take advantage of the
possibilities offered by overcoming such drawbacks.
SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION
Illumination methods and systems are provided herein that overcome many of the
drawbacks of conventional illumination systems. In embodiments, methods and systems are
provided for multicolored illumination. In an embodiment, the present invention is an
apparatus for providing an efficient, computer-controlled, multicolored illumination network
capable of high performance and rapid color selection and change.
In brief, disclosed herein is a current control for a lighting assembly, which may be an
LED system or LED lighting assembly, which may be a pulse width modulated ("PWM")
current control or other form of current control where each current-controlled unit is uniquely addressable and capable of receiving illumination color information on a computer lighting
network. As used herein, "current control" means PWM current control, analog current
control, digital current control, and any other method or system for controlling current.
As used herein, the term "LED system" means any system that is capable of receiving
an electrical signal and producing a color of light in response to the signal. Thus, the term
"LED system" should be understood to include light emitting diodes of all types, light emitting
polymers, semiconductor dies that produce light in response to current, organic LEDs,
electro-luminescent strips, and other such systems. In an embodiment, an "LED system" may
refer to a single light emitting diode having multiple semiconductor dies that are individually
controlled. An LED system is one type of illumination source. As used herein "illumination
source" should be understood to include all illumination sources, including LED systems, as
well as incandescent sources, including filament lamps, pyro-luminescent sources, such as
flames, candle-luminescent sources, such as gas mantles and carbon arch radiation sources, as
well as photo-luminescent sources, including gaseous discharges, flourescent sources,
phosphorescence sources, lasers, electro-luminescent sources, such as electro-luminescent
lamps, light emitting diodes, and cathode luminescent sources using electronic satiation, as
well as miscellaneous luminescent sources including galvano-luminescent sources, crystallo-
luminescent sources, kine-luminescent sources, thermo-luminescent sources, triboluminescent
sources, sonoluminescent sources, and radioluminescent sources. Illumination sources may also include luminescent polymers capable of producing primary colors.
The term "illuminate" should be understood to refer to the production of a frequency
of radiation by an illumination source. The term "color" should be understood to refer to any
frequency of radiation within a spectrum; that is, a "color," as used herein, should be
understood to encompass frequencies not only of the visible spectrum, but also frequencies in
the infrared and ultraviolet areas of the spectrum, and in other areas of the electromagnetic
spectrum.
In a further embodiment, the invention includes a tree network configuration of
lighting units (nodes). In another embodiment, the present invention comprises a heat
dissipating housing, made out of a heat-conductive material, for housing the lighting assembly.
The heat dissipating housing contains two stacked circuit boards holding respectively a power
module and a light module. In another embodiment, the LED board is thermally connected to
a separate heat spreader plate by means of a thermally conductive polymer and fasteners and
should be considered substantially the same as an LED board with metal in center. The light module is adapted to be conveniently interchanged with other light modules having
programmable current, and hence maximum light intensity, ratings. Such other light modules
may include organic LEDs, electro-luminescent strips, and other modules, in addition to
conventional LEDs. Other embodiments of the present invention involve novel applications
for the general principles described herein.
Disclosed herein is a high performance computer controlled multicolored lighting
network, which may be an LED lighting network. Disclosed herein is a LED lighting network
structure capable of both a linear chain of nodes and a tree configuration. Disclosed herein is
a heat-dissipating housing to contain the lighting units of the lighting network. Disclosed
herein is a current-regulated LED lighting apparatus, wherein the apparatus contains lighting
modules each having its own maximum current rating and each conveniently interchangeable with one another. Disclosed herein is a computer current-controlled LED lighting assembly
for use as a general illumination device capable of emitting multiple colors in a continuously
programmable twenty-four-bit spectrum. Disclosed herein are a flashlight, inclinometer,
thermometer, general environmental indicator and lightbulb, all utilizing the general computer
current-control principles of the present invention. Other aspects of the present disclosure will
be apparent from the detailed description below.
The present invention provides applications for digitally controlled LED based lights.
Systems and methods of the present invention include uses of such lights in a number of
technical fields in which illumination technology is critical. Systems and methods of the
present invention include systems whereby such lights may be made responsive to a variety of
different signals. Systems and methods of the present invention include improved data and
power distribution networks. Systems and methods of the present invention include use of LEDs as part of or on a wide range of items to provide aesthetically appealing or function effects. The digitally
controlled light emitting diodes (LEDs) of the present invention may be used in a number of
technological fields in inventions more particularly described below.
DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS
Fig. 1 depicts a light module of the present invention.
Fig. 2 depicts a light module of Fig. 1 in data connection with a generator of control
data for the light module.
Fig. 3 depicts a schematic of an embodiment of light module.
Fig. 4 depicts an array of LEDs in an embodiment of a light module.
Fig. 5 depicts a power module in an embodiment of the invention.
Fig. 6 depicts a circuit design for an embodiment of a light module.
Fig. 7 depicts a circuit design for an array of LEDs in a light module in an embodiment of the invention.
Fig. 8 depicts an array of LEDs that may be associated with a circuit such as that of
Fig. 6.
Fig. 9 depicts a schematic of the electrical design of an embodiment of a light module.
Fig. 10 depicts a power module for a light module of the invention.
Fig. 11 depicts another view of the power module of Fig. 10.
Fig. 12 depicts a circuit for a power supply for a light module of the invention.
Fig. 13 depicts a circuit for a power/data multiplexor.
Fig. 14 depicts a circuit for another embodiment of a power/data multiplexor.
Fig. 15 depicts flow charts depicting steps in a modified pulse width modulation
software routine. Fig 16 depicts a data delivery track lighting system
Fig 17 depicts a circuit design for a data driver for the track system of Fig 16
Fig 18 depicts a circuit design for a terminator for a track system of Fig 16
Fig 19 depicts an embodiment of a light module in which a cylindrical housing houses the light module
Fig 20 depicts a modular light module
Fig 21 depicts a modular light module constructed to fit a halogen socket
Fig 22 depicts a circuit design for an embodiment of a light module
Fig 23 depicts a modular housing for a light module
Fig 24 is a schematic illustration of a modular LED unit in accordance with one
embodiment of the present invention
Fig 25 illustrates a light module in accordance with one embodiment of the present invention
Fig 26 illustrates a light module in accordance with another embodiment of the present invention
Fig 27 illustrates a light module in accordance with a further embodiment of the
present invention
Figs 28A-C illustrate a plurality of LEDs arranged within the various configurations
for use with the modular LED unit of the present invention
Figs 29-68 illustrate the various environments within which the modular LED unit of
the present invention may illuminate
Fig 69 depicts a smart light bulb embodiment of the invention
Fig 70 depicts the embodiment of Fig 69 in data connection with another device
Fig 71 depicts the embodiment of Fig 69 in connection with other smart light bulbs Fig. 72 depicts a network of smart light bulbs in data connection with each other.
Fig. 73 depicts a light buffer sensor/feedback application using a smart light bulb.
Fig. 74 depicts an EKG sensor/feedback environment using a smart light bulb.
Fig. 75 depicts a schematic diagram of a sensor/feedback application.
Fig. 76 depicts a general block diagram relevant to a color thermometer.
Fig. 77 depicts a color speedometer.
Fig. 78 depicts a color inclinometer.
Fig. 79 depicts a color magnometer.
Fig. 80 depicts a smoke alert system.
Fig. 81 depicts a color pH meter.
Fig. 82 depicts a security system to indicate the presence of an object.
Fig. 83 depicts an electromagnetic radiation detector.
Fig. 84 depicts a color telephone indicator.
Fig. 85 depicts a lighting system using a light module of the present invention in
association with an entertainment device.
Fig. 86 depicts a schematic of the system of Fig. 85.
Fig. 87 depicts a schematic of an encoder for the system of Fig. 85.
Fig. 88 depicts a schematic of an encoding method using the encoder of Fig. 87.
Fig. 89 depicts a schematic of a decoder of the system of Fig. 85.
Fig. 90A depicts an embodiment of a system for precision illumination.
Fig. 90B depicts a block diagram of a control module for the precision illumination
system of Fig. 90 A.
Fig. 91 depicts an embodiment comprising a precision illumination system held in an
operator's hand. Fig 92A depicts fruit-bearing plants illuminated by an array of LED systems
Fig 92B depicts fruit-beaπng plants illuminated by natural light
Fig 93 A is a generally schematic view illustrating the anatomy of the porta hepatis as
illuminated by an embodiment of an LED system affixed to a medical instrument
Fig 93B depicts an embodiment of an LED system affixed to a medical instrument
Fig 93C depicts an embodiment of an LED system affixed to an endoscope
Fig 93 D depicts an embodiment of an LED system affixed to a surgical headlamp
Fig 93E depicts an embodiment of an LED system affixed to surgical loupes
Fig 94 depicts a method for treating a medical condition by illuminating with an
embodiment of an LED system
Fig 95 depicts changing the perceived color of colored objects by changing the color
of the light projected thereon
Fig 96 depicts creating an illusion of motion in a colored design by changing the color
of the light projected thereon
Fig 97 depicts a vending machine in which an illusion of motion in a colored design is
created by changing the color of the light projected thereon
Fig 98 depicts a vending machine in which objects appear and disappear in a colored
design by changing the color of the light projected thereon
Fig 99 depicts a system for illuminating a container
Fig 100 depicts an article of clothing lit by an LED system
DETAILED DESCRIPTION
The structure and operation of various methods and systems that are embodiments of
the invention will now be descπbed It should be understood that many other ways of practicing the invention herein are available, and the embodiments described herein are
exemplary and not limiting.
Referring to Fig. 1 , a light module 100 is depicted in block diagram format. The light
module 100 includes two components, a processor 16 and an LED system 120, which is
depicted in Fig. 1 as an array of light emitting diodes. The term "processor" is used herein to
refer to any method or system for processing in response to a signal or data and should be
understood to encompass microprocessors, integrated circuits, computer software, computer
hardware, electrical circuits, application specific integrated circuits, personal computers, chips,
and other devices capable of providing processing functions. The LED system 120 is
controlled by the processor 16 to produce controlled illumination. In particular, the processor
16 controls the intensity of different color individual LEDs, semiconductor dies, or the like of
the LED system 120 to produce illumination in any color in the spectrum. Instantaneous changes in color, strobing and other effects, more particularly described below, can be
produced with light modules such as the light module 100 depicted in Fig. 1. The light
module 100 may be made capable of receiving power and data. The light module 100,
through the processor 16, may be made to provide the various functions ascribed to the
various embodiments of the invention disclosed herein.
Referring to Fig. 2, the light module 100 may be constructed to be used either alone or
as part of a set of such light modules 100. An individual light module 100 or a set of light
modules 100 can be provided with a data connection 500 to one or more external devices, or,
in certain embodiments of the invention, with other light modules 100. As used herein, the
term "data connection" should be understood to encompass any system for delivering data,
such as a network, a data bus, a wire, a transmitter and receiver, a circuit, a video tape, a
compact disc, a DVD disc, a video tape, an audio tape, a computer tape, a card, or the like. A data connection may thus include any system of method to deliver data by radio frequency, ultrasonic, auditory, infrared, optical, microwave, laser, electromagnetic, or other transmission
or connection method or system. That is, any use of the electromagnetic spectrum or other
energy transmission mechanism could provide a data connection as disclosed herein. In
embodiments of the invention, the light module 100 may be equipped with a transmitter,
receiver, or both to facilitate communication, and the processor 16 may be programmed to
control the communication capabilities in a conventional manner. The light modules 100 may
receive data over the data connection 500 from a transmitter 502, which may be a
conventional transmitter of a communications signal, or may be part of a circuit or network
connected to the light module 100. That is, the transmitter 502 should be understood to
encompass any device or method for transmitting data to the light module 100. The
transmitter 502 may be linked to or be part of a control device 504 that generates control data
for controlling the light modules 100. In an embodiment of the invention, the control device 504 is a computer, such as a laptop computer. The control data may be in any form suitable
for controlling the processor 16 to control the LED system 120. In embodiment of the
invention, the control data is formatted according to the DMX-512 protocol, and conventional
software for generating DMX-512 instructions is used on a laptop or personal computer as the
control device 504 to control the light modules 100. The light module 100 may also be
provided with memory for storing instructions to control the processor 16, so that the light
module 100 may act in stand alone mode according to pre-programmed instructions.
Turning to Fig. 3, shown is an electrical schematic representation of the light module
100 in one embodiment of the present invention. Figs. 4 and 5 show the LED-containing side
and the electrical connector side of an exemplary embodiment of such a light module 100.
Light module 100 may be constructed, in an embodiment, as a self-contained module that is configured to be a standard item interchangeable with any similarly constructed light module.
Light module 100 contains a ten-pin electrical connector 1 10 of the general type. In this
embodiment, the connector 1 10 contains male pins adapted to fit into a complementary ten-pin
connector female assembly, to be described below. Pin 180 is the power supply. A source of
DC electrical potential enters light module 100 on pin 180. Pin 180 is electrically connected
to the anode end of light emitting diode (LED) sets 120, 140 and 160 to establish a uniform
high potential on each anode end.
LED system 120 includes a set 121 of red LEDs, a set 140 of blue LEDs, and a set
160 of green LEDs. The LEDs may be conventional LEDs, such those obtainable from the
Nichia America Corporation. These LEDs are primary colors, in the sense that such colors when combined in preselected proportions can generate any color in the spectrum. While use
of three primary colors is preferred, it will be understood that the present invention will
function nearly as well with only two primary colors to generate a wide variety of colors in the
spectrum. Likewise, while the different primary colors are arranged herein on sets of
uniformly colored LEDS, it will be appreciated that the same effect may be achieved with
single LEDs containing multiple color-emitting semiconductor dies. LED sets 121, 140 and
160 each preferably contains a serial/parallel array of LEDs in the manner described by Okuno
in U.S. Patent No. 4,298,869, incorporated herein by reference. In the present embodiment,
LED system 120 includes LED set 121, which contains three parallel connected rows of nine
red LEDs (not shown), as well as LED sets 140 and 160, which each contain five parallel
connected rows of five blue and green LEDS, respectively (not shown). It is understood by
those in the art that, in general, each red LED drops the potential in the line by a lower amount
than each blue or green LED, about two and one-tenth V, compared to four volts,
respectively, which accounts for the different row lengths. This is because the number of LEDs in each row is determined by the amount of voltage drop desired between the anode end at the power supply voltage and the cathode end of the last LED in the row. Also, the parallel
arrangement of rows is a fail-safe measure that ensures that the light module 100 will still
function even if a single LED in a row fails, thus opening the electrical circuit in that row. The
cathode ends of the three parallel rows of nine red LEDs in LED set 121 are then connected in
common, and go to pin 128 on connector 1 10. Likewise, the cathode ends of the five parallel
rows of five blue LEDs in LED set 140 are connected in common, and go to pin 148 on
connector 1 10. The cathode ends of the five parallel rows of five green LEDs in LED set 160
are connected in common, and go to pin 168 on connector 110. Finally, on light module 100,
each LED set in the LED system 120 is associated with a programming resistor that combines
with other components, described below, to program the maximum current through each set
of LEDS. Between pin 124 and 126 is resistor 122, six and two-tenths ohms. Between pin 144 and 146 is resistor 142, four and seven-tenths ohms. Between pin 164 and 166 is resistor
162, four and seven-tenths ohms. Resistor 122 programs maximum current through red LED
set 121, resistor 142 programs maximum current through blue LED set 140, and resistor 162
programs maximum current through green LED set 160. The values these resistors should
take are determined empirically, based on the desired maximum light intensity of each LED
set. In the embodiment depicted in Fig. 3, the resistances above program red, blue and green
currents of seventy, fifty and fifty mA, respectively.
As shown in Fig. 6, a circuit 10 for a digitally controlled LED-based light includes an
LED assembly 12 containing LED output channels 14, which are controlled by the processor
16. Data and power are fed to the circuit 10 via power and data input unit 18. The address
for the processor 16 is set by switch unit 20 containing switches which are connected to individual pins of pin set 21 of processor 16. An oscillator 19 provides a clock signal for
processor 16 via pins 9 and 10 of the same.
In an embodiment of the invention, data and power input unit 18 has four pins,
including a power supply 1 , which may be a twenty-four volt LED power supply, a processor
power supply 2, which may be a five volt processor power supply, a data in line 3 and a
ground pin 4. The first power supply 1 provides power to LED channels 14 of LED assembly
12. The second processor power supply 2 may be connected to power supply input 20 of
processor 16 to provide operating power for the processor 16 and also may be connected to a
pin 1 of the processor 16 to tie the reset high. A capacitor 24, such as a one-tenth microfarad
capacitor, may be connected between the processor power supply 2 and ground. The data line
3 may be connected to pin 18 of processor 16 and may be used to program and dynamically
control the processor 16. The ground may be connected to pins 8 and 19 of the processor 16.
LED assembly 12 may be supplied with power from the LED power supply 1 and may
contain a transistor-controlled LED channel 14. The LED channel 14 may supply power to at least one LED. As shown in Fig. 1, the LED assembly 12 may supply multiple LED channels
14 for different color LEDs (e.g., red, green and blue), with each LED channel 14 individually
controlled by a transistor 26. However, it is possible that more than one channel 14 could be
controlled by a single transistor 26.
As shown in Fig. 7, LEDs 15 may be arrayed in series to receive signals through each
of the LED channels 14. In the embodiment depicted in Fig. 7, a series of LEDs of each
different color (red, green and blue) is connected to an output LED channel 14 from the
circuit 10 of Fig. 6. LEDs 15 may also be arrayed to receive data according to a protocol
such as the DMX-512 protocol, so that many individual LEDs 15 may be controlled through
programming the processor 16. Referring again to Fig. 6, gates of transistors 26 are controlled by processor 16 to
thereby control operation of the LED channels 14 and the LEDs 15. In the illustrated
example, the output of the microprocessor appears on pins 12, 13 and 14 of processor 16,
which are then connected to the gates of the LED channels 14 of the LEDs 15. Additional
pins of processor 16 could be used to control additional LEDs. Likewise, different pins of
processor 16 could be used to control the illustrated LEDs 15, provided that appropriate
modifications were made to the instructions controlling operation of processor 16.
A resistor 28 may be connected between transistor 26 and ground. In the illustrated
example, resistor 28 associated with the red LED has a resistance value of sixty-two ohms,
and the resistors associated with the green and blue LEDs each have a resistance of ninety
ohms. A capacitor 29 may be connected between the first LED power supply 1 and ground.
In the illustrated embodiment, this capacitor has a value of one-tenth of a microfarad.
Processor 16 may be connected to an oscillator 19. One acceptable oscillator is a
crystal tank circuit oscillator which provides a twenty megaHertz clock. This oscillator may
be connected to pins 9 and 10 of processor 16. It is also possible to use an alternative
oscillator. Primary considerations associated with selection of an oscillator are consistency,
operating speed and cost.
In an embodiment of the invention, processor 16 is a programmable integrated circuit,
or PIC chip, such as a PIC 16C63 or PIC 16C66 manufactured by Microchip Technology, Inc.
A complete description of the PIC 16C6X series PIC chip (which includes both the PIC
16C63 and PIC 16C66) is attached to the U.S. Provisional Patent Application filed on
December 17, 1997, entitled Digitally Controlled Light Emitting Diode Systems and Methods,
to Mueller and Lys, and is incorporated by reference herein. Although the PIC 16C66 is
currently the preferred microprocessor, any processor capable of controlling the LEDs 15 of LED assembly 12 mav be used Thus, for example, an application specific integrated circuit
(ASIC) may be used instead of processor 16 Likewise, other commercially available
processors may also be used without departing from this invention
In an embodiment of the invention depicted in Fig 8, a total of eighteen LEDs 15 are
placed in three series according to color, and the series are arranged to form a substantially
circular array 37 The processor 16 can be used to separately control the precise intensity of
each color series of the LEDs 15, so that any color combination, and thus any color, can be
produced by the array 37
The responsiveness of LEDs to changing electrical signals permits computer control of
the LEDs via control of the electπcal impulses delivered to the LEDs Thus, by connecting
the LED to a power source via a circuit that is controlled by a processor, the user may precisely control the color and intensity of the LED Due to the relatively instantaneous
response of LEDs to changes in electπcal impulses, the color and intensity state of an LED
may be vaπed quite rapidly by changes in such impulses By placing individual LEDs into
arrays and controlling individual LEDs, very precise control of lighting conditions can be
obtained through use of a microprocessor The processor 16 may be controlled by
conventional means, such as a computer program, to send the appropπate electrical signals to
the appropπate LED at any given time The control may be digital, so that precise control is
possible Thus, overall lighting conditions may be vaπed in a highly controlled manner
With the electπcal structure of an embodiment of light module 100 descπbed, attention
will now be given to the electπcal structure of an example of a power module 200 in one
embodiment of the invention, shown in Fig 9 Figs 10 and 1 1 show the power terminal side
and electπcal connector side of an embodiment of power module 200 Like light module 100,
power module 200 may be self contained Interconnection with a male pin set 110 is achieved through complementary female pin set 210. Pin 280 connects with pin 180 for supplying power, delivered to pin 280 from supply 300. Supply 300 is shown as a functional block for
simplicity. In actuality, supply 300 can take numerous forms for generating a DC voltage. In
the present embodiment, supply 300 provides twenty-four volts through a connection terminal
(not shown), coupled to pin 280 through transient protection capacitors (not shown) of the
general type. It will be appreciated that supply 300 may also supply a DC voltage after
rectification and/or voltage transformation of an AC supply, as described more fully in U.S.
Patent No. 4,298,869.
Also connected to pin connector 210 are three current programming integrated
circuits, ICR 220, ICB 240 and ICG 260. Each of these may be a three terminal adjustable
regulator, such as part number LM317B, available from the National Semiconductor
Corporation, Santa Clara, California. The teachings of the LM317 datasheet are incorporated
herein by reference. Each regulator contains an input terminal, an output terminal and an
adjustment terminal, labeled I, O, and A, respectively. The regulators function to maintain a
constant maximum current into the input terminal and out of the output terminal. This
maximum current is pre-programmed by setting a resistance between the output and the
adjustment terminals. This is because the regulator will cause the voltage at the input terminal
to settle to whatever value is needed to cause one and twenty-five hundredths volts to appear
across the fixed current set resistor, thus causing constant current to flow. Since each
functions identically, only ICR 220 will now be described. First, current enters the input
terminal of ICR 220 from pin 228. Pin 228 in the power module is coupled to pin 128 in the
light module and receives current directly from the cathode end of the red LED system 121.
Since resistor 122 is ordinarily disposed between the output and adjustment terminals of ICR
220 through pins 224/124 and 226/126, resistor 122 programs the amount of current regulated by ICR 220. Eventually, the current output from the adjustment terminal of ICR 220 enters a Darlington driver. In this way, ICR 220 and associated resistor 122 program the maximum
current through red LED system 120. Similar results are achieved with ICB 240 and resistor
142 for blue LED set 140, and with ICG 260 and resistor 162 for green LED set 160.
The red, blue and green LED currents enter another integrated circuit, ICI 380, at
respective nodes 324, 344 and 364. ICI 380 may be a high current/voltage Darlington driver,
such as part no. DS2003, available from the National Semiconductor Corporation, Santa
Clara, California. ICI 380 may be used as a current sink, and may function to switch current
between respective LED sets and ground 390. As described in the DS2003 datasheet,
incorporated herein by reference, ICI contains six sets of Darlington transistors with
appropriate on-board biasing resistors. As shown, nodes 324, 344 and 364 couple the current
from the respective LED sets to three pairs of these Darlington transistors, in the well known
manner to take advantage of the fact that the current rating of ICI 380 may be doubled by
using pairs of Darlington transistors to sink respective currents. Each of the three on-board Darlington pairs is used in the following manner as a switch. The base of each Darlington pair
is coupled to signal inputs 424, 444 and 464, respectively. Hence, input 424 is the signal input
for switching current through node 324, and thus the red LED set 121. Input 444 is the signal
input for switching current though node 344, and thus the blue LED set 140. Input 464 is the
signal input for switching current through node 364, and thus the green LED set 160. Signal
inputs 424, 444 and 464 are coupled to respective signal outputs 434, 454 and 474 on
microcontroller IC2 400, as described below. In essence, when a high frequency square wave
is incident on a respective signal input, ICI 380 switches current through a respective node
with the identical frequency and duty cycle. Thus, in operation, the states of signal inputs 424, 444 and 464 directly correlate with the opening and closing of the power circuit through
respective LED sets 121, 140 and 160.
The structure and operation of microcontroller IC2 400 in the embodiment of Fig. 9
will now be described. Microcontroller IC2 400 is preferably a MICROCHIP brand
PIC16C63, although almost any properly programmed microcontroller or microprocessor can
perform the software functions described herein. The main function of microcontroller IC2
400 is to convert numerical data received on serial Rx pin 520 into three independent high
frequency square waves of uniform frequency but independent duty cycles on signal output
pins 434, 454 and 474. The Fig. 9 representation of microcontroller IC2 400 is partially
stylized, in that persons of skill in the art will appreciate that certain of the twenty-eight
standard pins have been omitted or combined for greatest clarity. Further detail as to a similar microcontroller is provided in connection with Fig. 12 for another embodiment of the
invention.
Microcontroller IC2 400 is powered through pin 450, which is coupled to a five volt
source of DC power 700. Source 700 is preferably driven from supply 300 through a coupling
(not shown) that includes a voltage regulator (not shown). An exemplary voltage regulator is
the LM340 3-terminal positive regulator, available from the National Semiconductor
Corporation, Santa Clara, California. The teachings of the LM340 datasheet are hereby
incorporated by reference. Those of skill in the art will appreciate that most microcontrollers,
and many other independently powered digital integrated circuits, are rated for no more than a
five volt power source. The clock frequency of microcontroller IC2 400 is set by crystal 480,
coupled through appropriate pins. Pin 490 is the microcontroller IC2 400 ground reference.
Switch 600 is a twelve position dip switch that may be alterably and mechanically set
to uniquely identify the microcontroller IC2 400. When individual ones of the twelve mechanical switches within dip switch 600 are closed, a path is generated from corresponding pins 650 on microcontroller IC2 400 to ground 690. Twelve switches create twenty-four
possible settings, allowing any microcontroller IC2 400 to take on one of four thousand
ninety-six different IDs, or addresses. In the embodiment of Fig. 9, only nine switches are
actually used because the DMX-512 protocol is employed.
Once switch 600 is set, microcontroller IC2 400 "knows" its unique address ("who am
I"), and "listens" on serial line 520 for a data stream specifically addressed to it. A high speed
network protocol, such as a DMX protocol, may be used to address network data to each
individually addressed microcontroller IC2 400 from a central network controller (not shown).
The DMX protocol is described in a United States Theatre Technology, Inc. publication
entitled "DMX512/1990 Digital Data Transmission Standard for Dimmers and Controllers,"
incorporated herein by reference. Basically, in the network protocol used herein, a central
controller (not shown) creates a stream of network data consisting of sequential data packets.
Each packet first contains a header, which is checked for conformance to the standard and discarded, followed by a stream of sequential characters representing data for sequentially
addressed devices. For instance, if the data packet is intended for light number fifteen, then
fourteen characters from the data stream will be discarded, and the device will save character
number fifteen. If as in the preferred embodiment, more than one character is needed, then the
address is considered to be a starting address, and more than one character is saved and
utilized. Each character corresponds to a decimal number zero to two hundred fifty-five,
linearly representing the desired intensity from Off to Full. (For simplicity, details of the data
packets such as headers and stop bits are omitted from this description, and will be well
appreciated by those of skill in the art.) This way, each of the three LED colors is assigned a
discrete intensity value between zero and two hundred fifty-five. These respective intensity values are stored in respective registers within the memory of microcontroller IC2 400 (not
shown) Once the central controller exhausts all data packets, it starts over in a continuous
refresh cycle The refresh cycle is defined by the standard to be a minimum of one thousand
one hundred ninety-six microseconds, and a maximum of one second.
Microcontroller IC2 400 is programmed continually to "listen" for its data stream
When microcontroller IC2 400 is "listening," but before it detects a data packet intended for it,
it is running a routine designed to create the square wave signal outputs on pins 434, 454 and
474 The values in the color registers determine the duty cycle of the square wave Since
each register can take on a value from zero to two hundred fifty five, these values create two
hundred fifty six possible different duty cycles in a linear range from zero percent to one
hundred percent. Since the square wave frequency is uniform and determined by the program running in the microcontroller IC2 400, these different discrete duty cycles represent variations
in the width of the square wave pulses. This is known as pulse width modulation (PWM).
In one embodiment of the invention, the PWM interrupt routine is implemented using a
simple counter, incrementing from zero to two hundred fifty-five in a cycle during each period
of the square wave output on pins 434, 454 and 474 When the counter rolls over to zero, all
three signals are set high. Once the counter equals the register value, signal output is changed
to low. When microcontroller IC2 400 receives new data, it freezes the counter, copies the
new data to the working registers, compares the new register values with the current count
and updates the output pins accordingly, and then restarts the counter exactly where it left off
Thus, intensity values may be updated in the middle of the PWM cycle. Freezing the counter
and simultaneously updating the signal outputs has at least two advantages. First, it allows
each lighting unit to quickly pulse/strobe as a strobe light does. Such strobing happens when
the central controller sends network data having high intensity values alternately with network data having zero intensity values at a rapid rate. If one restarted the counter without first
updating the signal outputs, then the human eye would be able to perceive the staggered
deactivation of each individual color LED that is set at a different pulse width. This feature is
not of concern in incandescent lights because of the integrating effect associated with the
heating and cooling cycle of the illumination element. LEDS, unlike incandescent elements,
activate and deactivate essentially instantaneously in the present application. The second
advantage is that one can "dim" the LEDs without the flickering that would otherwise occur if
the counter were reset to zero. The central controller can send a continuous dimming signal
when it creates a sequence of intensity values representing a uniform and proportional
decrease in light intensity for each color LED. If one did not update the output signals before restarting the counter, there is a possibility that a single color LED will go through nearly two
cycles without experiencing the zero current state of its duty cycle. For instance, assume the
red register is set at 4 and the counter is set at 3 when it is frozen. Here, the counter is frozen
just before the "off part" of the PWM cycle is to occur for the red LEDS. Now assume that
the network data changes the value in the red register from four to two and the counter is
restarted without deactivating the output signal. Even though the counter is greater than the
intensity value in the red register, the output state is still "on", meaning that maximum current
is still flowing through the red LEDS. Meanwhile, the blue and green LEDs will probably turn
off at their appropriate times in the PWM cycle. This would be perceived by the human eye as
a red flicker in the course of dimming the color intensities. Freezing the counter and updating
the output for the rest of the PWM cycle overcomes these disadvantages, ensuring the flicker
does not occur.
The microprocessors that provide the digital control functions of the LEDs of the
present invention may be responsive to any electrical signal; that is, external signals may be used to direct the microprocessors to control the LEDs in a desired manner. A computer
program may control such signals, so that a programmed response to given input signals is
possible. Thus, signals may be generated that turn individual LEDs on and off, that vary the
color of individual LEDs throughout the color spectrum, that strobe or flash LEDs at
predetermined intervals that are controllable to very short time intervals, and that vary the
intensity of light from a single LED or collection of LEDs. A variety of signal-generating
devices may be used in accordance with the present invention to provide significant benefits to
the user. Input signals can range from simple on-off or intensity signals, such as that from a
light switch or dial, or from a remote control, to signals from detectors, such as detectors of
ambient temperature or light. The precise digital control of arrayed LEDs in response to a wide range of external signals permits applications in a number of technological fields in
accordance with the present invention.
The network interface for microcontroller IC2 400 will now be described. Jacks 800
and 900 are standard RJ-45 network jacks. Jack 800 is used as an input jack, and is shown for
simplicity as having only three inputs: signal inputs 860, 870 and ground 850. Network data enters jack 800 and passes through signal inputs 860 and 870. These signal inputs are then
coupled to IC3 500, which is an RS-485/RS-422 differential bus repeater of the standard type,
preferably a DS96177 from the National Semiconductor Corporation, Santa Clara, California.
The teachings of the DS96177 datasheet are hereby incorporated by reference. The signal
inputs 860, 870 enter IC3 500 at pins 560, 570. The data signal is passed through from pin
510 to pin 520 on microcontroller IC2 400. The same data signal is then returned from pin
540 on IC2 400 to pin 530 on IC3 500. Jack 900 is used as an output jack and is shown for
simplicity as having only five outputs: signal outputs 960, 970, 980, 990 and ground 950.
Outputs 960 and 970 are split directly from input lines 860 and 870, respectively. Outputs 980 and 990 come directly from IC3 500 pins 580 and 590, respectively. It will be
appreciated that the foregoing assembly enables two network nodes to be connected for
receiving the network data. Thus, a network may be constructed as a daisy chain, if only
single nodes are strung together, or as a tree, if two or more nodes are attached to the output
of each single node.
From the foregoing description, one can see that an addressable network of LED
illumination or display units can be constructed from a collection of power modules each
connected to a respective light module. As long as at least two primary color LEDs are used,
any illumination or display color may be generated simply by preselecting the light intensity
that each color LED emits. Further, each color LED can emit light at any of 255 different
intensities, depending on the duty cycle of PWM square wave, with a full intensity generated
by passing maximum current through the LED. Further still, the maximum intensity can be
conveniently programmed simply by adjusting the ceiling for the maximum allowable current using programming resistances for the current regulators residing on the light module. Light
modules of different maximum current ratings may thereby be conveniently interchanged.
In an alternative embodiment of the invention, a special power supply module 38 is
provided, as depicted in Fig. 12. The power supply module 38 may be disposed on any
platform of the light module 100, such as, for example, the platform of the embodiment
depicted in Figs. 4 and 5. The output of the power supply module 38 supplies power to a
power and data input, such as the power and data input 18 of the circuit 10 of Fig. 6. The
power supply module 38 is capable of taking a voltage or current input in a variety of forms,
including an intermittent input, and supplying a steady, clean source of power to the circuit 10.
In the embodiment depicted in Fig. 12, the power supply module includes inputs 40, which
may be incoming electrical signals that would typically be of alternating current type. Incoming signals are then converted by a rectifying element 42, which in an embodiment of the
invention is a bridge rectifier consisting of four diodes 44. The rectifying element 42 rectifies
the alternating current signal into a clean direct current signal. The power supply module 38
may further include a storage element 48, which may include one or more capacitors 50. The
storage element stores power that is supplied by the rectifying element 42, so that the power
supply module 38 can supply power to the input 18 of the circuit 10 of Fig. 6, even if power to
the input 40 of the power supply module 38 is intermittent. In the illustrated example, one of
the capacitors is an electrolytic capacitor with a value of three hundred thirty microfarads.
The power supply module 38 may further include a boost converter 52. The boost
converter takes a low voltage direct current and boosts and cleans it to provide a higher
voltage to the DC power input 18 of the circuit 10 of Fig. 6. The boost converter 52 may include an inductor 54, a controller 58, one or more capacitors 60, one or more resistors 62,
and one or more diodes 64. The resistors limit the data voltage excursions in the signal to the
processor of the circuit 10. The controller 58 may be a conventional controller suitable for
boost conversion, such as the LTC1372 controller provided by Linear Technology
Corporation. The teachings of the LTC1372 data sheet are incorporated by reference herein.
In the illustrated embodiment, the boost converter 52 is capable of taking power at
approximately ten volts and converting it to a clean power at twenty-four volts. The twenty-
four volt power can be used to power the circuit 10 and the LEDs 15 of Fig. 6.
In certain embodiments of the invention, power and data are supplied to the circuit 10
and the LEDs 15 by conventional means, such as a conventional electrical wire or wires for
power and a separate wire, such as the RS-485 wire, for data, as in most applications of the
DMX-512 protocol. For example, in the embodiment of Fig. 4 and Fig. 5, a separate data wire may provide data to control the LEDs 15, if the platform 30 is inserted into a
conventional halogen fixture 34 that has only electrical power.
In another embodiment, electrical power and serial data are simultaneously supplied to
the device, which may be a lighting device such as the LED-based lighting device of Fig. 1 or
may be any other device that requires both electrical power and data. Electrical power and
data may be supplied to multiple lighting devices on a single pair of wires. In particular, in this
embodiment of the invention, power is delivered to the device (and, where applicable, through
the power supply module 38) along a two wire data bus such as the type normally used for
lighting in applications where high power is required, such as halogen lamps.
In an embodiment of the invention, the power supply module 38 recovers power from
data lines. In order to permit power recovery from data lines, a power data multiplexer 60 is
provided, which amplifies an incoming data stream to produce logical data levels, with one or more of the logical states having sufficient voltage or current that power can be recovered
during that logical state. Referring to Fig. 13, in an embodiment of the invention, a data input
64 is provided, which may be a line driver or other input for providing data. In embodiment of
the invention, the data is DMX-512 protocol data for control of lighting, such as LEDs. It
should be understood that the power data multiplexer 60 could manipulate data according to
other protocols and for control of other devices.
The power data multiplexer 60 may include a data input element 68 and a data output
element 70. The data output element 70 may include an output element 72 that supplies
combined power and data to a device, such as the power supply module 38 of Fig. 12, or the
input 18 of the circuit 10 of Fig. 6. The data input element 68 may include a receiver 74,
which may be an RS-485 receiver for receiving DMX-512 data, or any other conventional
receiver for receiving data according to a protocol. The data input element 68 may further include a power supply 78 with a voltage regulator 80, for providing regulated power to the
receiver 74 and the data output element 70. The data input element 68 supplies a data signal
to the data output element 70. In the illustrated embodiment of Fig. 12, a TTL data signal is
supplied. The data output element 70 amplifies the data signal and determines the relative
voltage direction of the output. In the illustrated embodiment, a chip 82 consists of a high
speed PWM stepper motor driver chip that amplifies the data signal to a positive signal of
twenty four volts to reflect a logical one and to negative signal of twenty four volts to reflect a
logical zero. It should be understood that different voltages could be used to reflect logical
ones and zeros. For example, zero volts could represent logical zero, with a particular
positive or negative voltage representing a logical one.
In this embodiment, the voltage is sufficient to supply power while maintaining the logical data values of the data stream. The chip 82 may be any conventional chip capable of
taking an input signal and amplifying it in a selected direction to a larger voltage. It should be
understood that any circuit for amplifying data while maintaining the logical value of the data
stream may be used for the power data multiplexer 60.
The embodiments of Figs. 12 and 13 should be understood to encompass any devices
for converting a data signal transmitted according to a data protocol, in which certain data are
represented by nonzero signals in the protocol, into power that supplies an electrical device.
The device may be a light module 100, such as that depicted in Fig. 1.
In an embodiment of the invention, the data supplied to the power data multiplexer 60
is data according to the USITT DMX-512 protocol, in which a constant stream of data is
transmitted from a console, such as a theatrical console, to all devices on the DMX-512
network. DMX-512 formats are enforced upon the data. Because of this one can be assured
that the power data multiplexer 60, either in the embodiment depicted in Fig. 13, or in another embodiment, can amplify the DMX-512 signal from the standard signal voltage and/or
electrical current levels to higher voltages, and usually higher electrical currents.
The resulting higher power signal from the power data multiplexer 60 can be converted
back into separated power by the power supply module 38, or by another circuit capable of
providing rectification with a diode and filtering with a capacitor for the power.
The data stream from the power data multiplexor 60 can be recovered by simple
resistive division, which will recover a standard data voltage level signal to be fed to the input
18. Resistive division can be accomplished by the resistors 84 of Fig. 12.
The power data multiplexer 62, when combined with the power supply module 38 and
the array 37 mounted on a modular platform 30, permits the installation of LED-based,
digitally controlled lighting using already existing wires and fixtures. As the system permits the device to obtain power and data from a single pair of wires, no separate data or power
wires are required. The power data multiplexor 60 can be installed along a conventional data
wire, and the power supply module 38 can be installed on the platform 30. Thus, with a
simple addition of the power data multiplexor 60 and the insertion of the modular platform 30
into a conventional halogen fixture, the user can have LED based, digitally controlled lights by
supplying DMX-512 data to the power data multiplexor 60.
It should be understood that the power supply module 38 can be supplied with
standard twelve volt alternating current in a non-modified manner. That is, the power supply
module can supply the array 37 from alternating current present in conventional fixtures, such
as MR- 16 fixtures. If digital control is desired, then a separate data wire can be supplied, if
desired. Another embodiment of a power data multiplexor 60 is depicted in Fig. 14. In this embodiment, a power supply of between twelve and twenty-four volts is used, connected to
input terminals 899.
The voltage at 803 is eight volts greater than the supply voltage. The voltage at 805 is
about negative eight volts. The voltage at 801 is five volts. The power data multiplexor 60
may include decoupling capacitors 807 and 809 for the input power supply. A voltage
regulator 81 1 creates a clean, five volt supply, decoupled by capacitor 813. A voltage
regulator 815, which may be an LM317 voltage regulator available from National
Semiconductor, forms an eighteen volt voltage regulator with resistors 817 and 819,
decoupled by capacitors 821 and 823. The teachings of the LM317 data sheet are
incorporated by reference herein. This feeds an adjustable step down regulator 823, which
may be an LT1375 step down regulator available from Linear Technology of Milpitas CA, operated in the voltage inverting configuration. The teachings of the LT1375 data sheet are
incorporated by reference herein. The resistances of resistors 817 and 819 have been selected
create negative eight volts, and a diode 844 is a higher voltage version than that indicated in
the data sheet , inductor 846 is may be any conventional inductor, for example, one with a
value of one hundred uH to allow a smaller and cheaper capacitor to be used for the capacitor
848, supply has been further bypassed with capacitor 852. Diode 854 may be a plastic
packaged version 1N914, and frequency compensating capacitor 856 sized appropriately for
changes in other components according to data sheet formulas. The circuit generates negative
eight volts at 805.
Also included may be a step up voltage regulator 825, which may be an LT1372
voltage regulator available from Linear Technology of Milpitas, California. The teachings of
the LT1372 data sheet are incorporated by reference herein. The step up voltage regulator may be of a standard design. Diode 862 may be a diode with higher voltage than that taught
by the data sheet. Inductor 864 and capacitor 839 may be sized appropriately according to
data sheet formulas to generate eight volts more than input voltage over the range between
input voltages of twelve and twenty-four volts. Capacitor 866 may be sized for frequency
compensation given values of inductor 864 and capacitor 868 as per data sheet guidelines. A
set of resistors 827, 833, 837, along with transistors 829 form the voltage feedback circuit.
Resistors 833 and 837 form a voltage divider, producing a voltage in proportion to the output
voltage 803 at the feedback node pin 835. Resistors 827 and transistors 829 form a current
mirror, drawing a current from the feedback node at 835 in proportion to the input voltage.
The voltage at feedback pin 835 is thus proportional to the output voltage minus the input
voltage. The ratio of resistor 833 to that of resistor 837, which may need to be equal to
resistor 827 for the subtraction to work, is chosen to produce eight volts. Capacitors 839 may
be used to further bypass the supply.
Incoming data, which may be in the form of an incoming RS-485 protocol data stream, is received by a receiver chip 841 at the pins 843 and 845, buffered, and amplified to produce
true and complement data signals at pins 847 and 849 respectively. These signals are further
buffered and inverted by element 851 to produce true and complement data signals with
substantial drive capabilities at pins 853 and 855, respectively.
Each of the signals from the pins 853 and 855 is then processed by an output amplifier.
There are two output amplifiers 857 and 859, which may be substantially identical in design
and function. In each case, the data signal entering the amplifier connected to two switched
cascode type current sources 861 and 863, the first composed of resistor 865 and transistor
867, the second composed of resistor 869 and transistor 871, at the junction of the two
resistors 865 and 869. The current source 863 will sink a current of approximately 20 milliamps when the signal entering the amplifier is low, such as at zero volts, and will sink no
current when the signal is high, for example at positive five volts. The other current source
861 will source approximately twenty milliamperes when the signal is high, but not when low.
These currents are fed to two current mirrors 873 and 875, composed of transistors 877 and
879 and resistors 881 and 883 for current source 863 and transistors 885 and 887 and resistors
889 and 891 for current source 861, which are of a standard design, familiar to analog circuit
designers. The collectors of transistors 877 and 885 are connected together, forming a current
summing node. The net current delivered to this node by these transistors will be about
twenty milliamps in either the sourcing direction (flowing into the node) if the input signal is
low, or the sinking direction (flowing out of the node) if the signal is high. When a transition
from the low state to the high state occurs at the input signal, the resulting twenty milliampere
sinking current will cause capacitor 893 (and the parasitic capacitance at this node) to
discharge at a controlled rate of approximately fifty volts per microsecond, until the voltage at
the node reaches approximately negative five volts, at which time diodes 895 and 897 will begin to conduct, clamping the negative excursion of the node voltage at negative five volts,
and preventing the saturation of transistor 885. Transistors 899 and 901 form a bi-directional
Class B voltage follower of a standard design, and the voltage at the junction of their emitters
follows the transition at the node connected to capacitor 893. Specifically transistor 899 turns
off and transistor 901 conducts, causing the voltage at the gates of transistors 903 and 907 to
decrease, switching off transistor 903 and slowly turning on transistor 907, causing current to
flow from the output pin 909 to ground. Field effect transistors 903 and 907, which may be of
the type available from National Semiconductor of Santa Clara, California, also form a Class B
Voltage follower, of standard design. When the voltage at the current summing node is clamped at negative five volts, the voltage at the gate of 903 will reach negative four and four-
tenths volts, and transistor 907 will remain on so long as the input signal remains high.
Once the input signal goes low, the current at the summing node will change direction,
and capacitor 893 will charge at the same rate, eventually being clamped to a value of the
input voltage plus five volts. Transistor 899 will cause the voltage at the gates of transistor
903 and transistor 905 to rise, turning off transistor 903 and turning on transistor 907,
sourcing current from the input supply to the output through resistor 91 1. It will take
approximately five hundred nanoseconds for the voltage at the summing node, and hence the
output, to fully switch between zero and twenty-four volts (if the power input is the maximum
of twenty four volts), or approximately two hundred fifty nanoseconds to move between zero
and twelve volts (if the power input is twelve volts). Transistor 905 and resistor 911 form a
short circuit protection circuit, limiting the current flowing through 903 to approximately six
amperes. Diode 913 isolates the short circuit protector circuit when transistor 903 is not on.
No protection is provided for transistor 907, because the expected short circuit paths would be either to ground or to the other amplifier channel. In the first case no current could flow
through transistor 907, while in the second, the other amplifier's short circuit protection would
protect transistor 907.
Because of the bridge rectifier at the input to the device, as disclosed in connection
with the description of the embodiment of Fig. 6, the power data multiplexor circuits depicted
in Figs 13 and 14 supply power to the device during both the data=l and data=0 states and
does not rely on any data format at the input to maintain sufficient power to the device. The
data is extracted as in other embodiments of the invention.
The circuit of Fig. 14 produces a controlled slew rate; that is, the power and data
generated have relatively smooth transitions between a logical zero state and a local one state. The controlled slew rate produced by the circuit of Fig 14 decreases the magnitude of the
radio frequency interference generated, as descπbed more particularly below in connection
with the data track embodiment of the invention
The lamps themselves auto terminate the line, as their input looks substantially similar
to the terminating circuit in the track embodiment described below, having the same effect as
that terminating circuit This eliminates any need for terminators on the line Additional
termination is only needed in the case of a device that is commanded to be off, with actual data
wire impedance low, with a long wire, and where there are many transitions going by Since
this is a very unlikely combination of factors, the configuration with an additional terminator is
not needed as a practical matter
For the embodiment of Fig 14, six amperes of power runs forty eight lights at twenty-
four volts or twenty four lights at twelve volts
In an embodiment of the invention, a modified method and system is provide to
provide multiple simultaneous high speed pulse width modulated signals The method may be accomplished by computer software coding of the steps depicted in the flow charts 202 and
205 of Fig 15, or by computer hardware designed to accomplish these functions To generate
a number, N, of PWM signals, in a step 204 the processor schedules an interrupt of at least N
possibly equal (as in this embodiment) sub-periods In this embodiment this interrupt is
generated by a counter, interrupting the processor every two hundred fifty-six processor clock
cycles In step 208 each sub-period's coarse PWM values are computed In step 212, the
vernier value for each PWM channel is computed The sub-periods may be denoted P, where
the first sub-period is one, etc
In each sub-period, which begins with an interrupt at a step 213, the interrupt routine
executes the steps of the flow chart 205 In a step 214, all PWM signals are updated from pre-computed values corresponding to this specific sub-period. In most cases this entails a single read from an array of pre-computed values, followed by a single write to update the
multiple I/O pins on which the PWM signals are generated.
In a step 218, one of the PWM signals is then modified. The step 218 is accomplished
by executing a write to the I/O pins, executing a series of instructions consuming the desired
amount of time, and then executing another update (I/O) write.
In a step 222, the processor advances the sub-period bookkeeping value to point to the
next sub-period.
The vernier in the step 218 can reduce or increase the amount of time that the PWM
signal is on, by changing the state of the signal for up to one-half of the sub-period. There are
two possible cases. Either the coarse update places the signal in the "off' state and the vernier routine turns it "on" for a time period of up to one-half of the sub period, or the coarse
update is "on" and the vernier routine turns the signal "off" for a period of time of up to one-
half of the sub period. Using this method, each PWM signal can change multiple times per PWM period.
This is advantageous because software can use this property to further increase the apparent
PWM frequency, while still maintaining a relatively low interrupt rate.
The method disclosed thus far consumes a maximum of approximately half of the
processor time compared to conventional PWM routines.
As an example: consider two signals A and B with a resolution of twenty counts
programmed to seven and fourteen counts respectively. These signals could be generated as
follows:
A: |+V_V-H-H-H-| I
B: 1 1 i i i M i -t i +|_Λ++Λ I Pi: Λl Λ2
In this example the pre-computed update value at P-=] is both signals on. Signal A
then spends some time in the on state, while the interrupt routine continues to execute. A then
goes off in the vernier step at the first "v", and the interrupt routine executes time delay code
during the time before restoring the signal to the on state at the second "v".
The actual time between the multiple update at the beginning of the sub period and the
vernier update need not be known, so long as the time spent between the vernier updates is the
desired time. While the vernier updates are occurring, signal B, which was switched on,
remains on and un-affected. When the second interrupt occurs, both signals are switched off,
and the vernier routine now adds four additional counts to the period of signal B. In this
example only thirty-five percent of the processor time plus the time required for two interrupts
has been consumed.
Since only one vernier period is required per signal generated, increasing the number of
periods per PWM cycle can generate non-uniform PWM waveforms at frequencies higher than
those possible on most microprocessors' dedicated hardware PWM outputs for a large number
of possible PWM channels. The microprocessor still executes interrupts at fixed intervals.
To change the duty cycles of the signals produced, the software can asynchronously
update any or all of the coarse or vernier values, in any order, without having to worry about
synchronization with the interrupt routine, and more importantly, without stopping it. The
interrupt routine never changes any variables which the main code changes or vice-versa.
Thus there is no need for interlocks of any kind.
This software routine can thus utilize a single timer to generate multiple PWM signals,
with each signal ultimately having the resolution of a single processor cycle. On a Microchip
PIC microprocessor, this allows three PWM signals to be generated with a resolution of two hundred fifty-six counts, each corresponding to only a four instruction delay. This allows a
PWM period of just one thousand twenty four instruction cycles, i.e four thousand eight
hundred eighty two Hertz at a twenty megaHertz clock.
Furthermore, for counts between sixty-four and one hundred ninety-two, the PWM
waveform is a non-uniform nine thousand seven hundred sixty-five Hertz signal, with much
lower noise than a conventional PWM generator in such a processor.
As described above, the LED arrays of the present invention are responsive to external
electrical signals and data. Accordingly, it is desirable to have improved data and signal
distribution mechanisms in order to take full advantage of the benefits of the present invention.
In an embodiment of the invention, the data connection 500 can be a DMX or lighting data
network bus disposed in a track on which conventional lights or LEDs are located. Thus, a track capable of delivering data signals may be run inside a track lighting apparatus for LEDs
or conventional lights. The data signals may then be controlled by a microprocessor to permit
intelligent individual control of the individual lamps or LEDs. It is within the scope of the
present invention to provide distributed lights that are responsive to both electrical and data
control.
The LEDs of the present invention are highly responsive to changes the input signal.
Accordingly, to take advantage of the features of the invention, rapid data distribution is
desirable. In embodiment of the invention, a method for increasing the communication speed
of DMX-512 networks is provided. In particular, DMX 512-networks send data at two
hundred fifty-thousand baud. All receivers are required by the DMX standard to recognize a
line break of a minimum of eighty-eight microseconds. After the mark is recognized, all
devices wait to receive a start code and ignore the rest of the packet if anything other than
zero was received. If a non-zero start code is sent prior to sending data at a higher baud rate, the devices are able to respond more quickly to the higher baud rate. Alternatively channels above a certain number could be assigned to the high baud rate, and other devices would not
be deprived of necessary data as they would already have received their data from that frame.
It may be desirable to frame several characters with correct stop bits to prevent loss of
synchronization.
The present invention may also include an automation system chassis that consists of a
mother board that communicates with a network and/or bus using the DMX, Ethernet or other
protocol to control a wide range of electrical devices, including the LED arrays of the present
invention.
In another embodiment of the invention, the input signals for the microprocessor can
be obtained from a light control network that does not have a direct electrical circuit connection. A switch that is mounted on a wall or a remote control can transmit a
programmed infrared, radio frequency or other signal to a receiver which can then transmit the
signal to the microprocessor. Another embodiment provides a different track lighting system. Present track lighting
systems use both the physical and electrical properties of a track of materials, which typically
consist of an extruded aluminum track housing extruded plastic insulators to support and
house copper conductors. A conventional track lighting system delivers power and provides a
mechanical support for light fixtures, which can generally be attached to the "track" at any
location along its length by a customer without tools.
In the simplest form, a track provides only two conductors, and all fixtures along the
track receive power from the same two conductors. In this situation, all fixtures attached to
the track are controlled by a single control device. It is not possible to control remotely (switch on or off, or dim) a subset of the fixtures attached to the track without affecting the
other fixtures.
Track systems have generally included more than two conductors, primarily because of
the requirements of the Underwriters Laboratories for a separate ground conductor. Many
systems have also endeavored to provide more than just two current-carrying conductors.
The purpose of additional current-carrying conductors is typically either to increase the total
power carrying capacity of the track, or to provide separate control over a subset of fixtures.
Tracks with up to four "circuits," or current-carrying conductors, are known.
Even with four circuits however, full flexibility may not be achieved with conventional
tracks, for a number of reasons. First, a fixture is assigned to a subset at the time of insertion into the track. Thus, that fixture will be affected by signals for the particular subset. If there
are more lights than circuits, it is not possible to control lights individually with conventional
systems. Also, the fixture typically only receives power, which can be modified somewhat (i.e.
dimmed), but cannot easily be used to send substantial quantities of data. Further, information
cannot be returned easily from the fixtures.
The track embodiment disclosed herein provides individual control of a large number
of lighting fixtures installed on a track and allows robust bi-directional communication over
that track, while complying with regulatory requirements pertaining to both safety and
pertaining to elimination of spurious radio frequency emissions. Disclosed herein are methods
and systems for creating electrical signals for delivering data to a multitude of lighting fixtures
attached to a track, a track capable of delivering the signals to the fixtures, and specialized
termination devices for ensuring that the signals do not cause excessive spurious reflections.
Referring to Fig. 16, in an embodiment, a user may wish to send lighting control data
over a track 6002 to a fixture 6000, preferably using an industry standard. The fixture 6000 could be a light module 100, such as that disclosed herein, or it could be any other conventional fixture capable of connection to a conventional track lighting track. In an
embodiment, the data control standard is the DMX-512 standard described herein.
DMX-512 specifies the use of RS-485 voltage signaling levels and input/output
devices. However, use of RS-485 presents certain problems in the track lighting applications
described herein, because it requires that the network to which the fixture 6000 is attached be
in the form of a bus, composed of lengths of controlled impedance media, and it requires that
the network be terminated at each bus endpoint. These properties are not provided in typical
track lighting systems, which generally do not contain controlled impedance conductor
systems. Furthermore, track installations often contain branches or "Ts" at which one section
of track branches to multiple other sections, and it is undesirable to electrically regenerate
signals at such points, for cost, reliability and installation reasons. Because of this, each section cannot be "terminated" with its characteristic impedance to achieve a properly
terminated network for purposes of RS-485. It is possible however, through the present invention, to send signals conforming to a
modification of the RS-485 specification, which can be received by currently available devices
that conform to the RS-485 specification.
To deliver data effectively in this environment, a new data transmitter 6004 is needed.
In order to negate the transmission line effect created by the multiple sections of track, a
controlled waveshape driver is utilized as the data transmitter 6004. The design of this driver
may be further optimized to minimize the amount of unintended radio frequency radiation, to
allow conformance to FCC and CE regulatory requirements. To further ensure signal
integrity, a specialized termination network may be utilized. Certain characteristics of the track system are relevant. First, multiple sections of track
can be viewed as a collection of individual transmission lines, each with some (generally
unknown) characteristic impedance, and with some unknown length. Fixtures attached to the
track present some load along the transmission line's length. The RS-485 standard specifies
that the minimum impedance of such loads shall be not less than ten and five-tenths kilo-ohms,
and that the added capacitance must not exceed fifty picofarads. In a large lighting network, it
is possible to envision a track system comprised of several dozen sections, each up to several
meters long. The total number of fixtures can easily exceed two hundred in just a single room.
Thus the total load presented by the controlled devices alone can be below fifty ohms and
contain an added ten thousand picofarads of capacitance. Furthermore, crosstalk between the
power conductors and signal conductors in the track can also occur. The track itself may
present upwards of twenty-five picofarads per foot of additional capacitance.
It is generally understood that transmission lines shorter than one-fourth of the
wavelength of the highest frequency signal transmitted on them can be analyzed and viewed as a lumped load; i.e., their transmission line effects can be effectively ignored. Thus any
combination of loads and track sections can be viewed as a single lumped load, so long as the maximum length from any one terminus to any other terminus is less than one-fourth of the
wavelength of the highest frequency signal delivered to it. For a digital signal, the highest
frequency component is the edge, at which the signal transitions between the two voltage
states representing a logical one and a logical zero. The DMX-512 lighting control protocol
specifies a data transmission rate of two hundred fifty thousand bits per second. The signal
edge transition time required to reliably transmit such a signal is at least five times faster than
that rate; i.e., the transition must occur in no longer than eight hundred nanoseconds, in order
to assure reliable data transmission. If we assume that a data driver capable of creating electrical signals which transition at this rate can be constructed, that the speed of light is three
times ten to the eighth meters per second, and that the velocity of propagation in track is
approximately seventy percent of the speed of light, then a conservative limit on the maximum
network length is about forty-two meters. This is an adequate length for most applications.
Assuming that the total length of a branched network might be as much as two such forty-two
meter track sections, a total capacitance added by the track itself could be as much as another
seven thousand picofarads, for a total load of seventeen thousand picofarads.
In order to effectively transmit data into such a network, a driver with significantly
more power than a driver for the current RS-485 standard is required. To achieve a five volt
transition, for a highly loaded network as described above, the driver is preferably capable of
supplying at least one hundred milliamps continuously for the resistive portion of the load, and
at least one hundred milliamps additionally during the transition period, which will be absorbed
by the capacitive load. Thus the driver output current is preferably at least two hundred milliamps to ensure adequate margin. A circuit design for a driver 6004 which meets these
criteria is illustrated in Fig. 17. It is important to note that transitions faster than eight
hundred nanoseconds will still not cause the network to fail, but will cause the current needed during the transient to increase, will cause excessive ringing at lightly loaded track endpoints,
and will substantially increase the spurious radio frequency generated from the system. All of
these effects are undesirable. At an eight hundred nanosecond transition time, most spurious
harmonics generated by the system fall well below the thirty megahertz starting frequency for
CE testing, and higher order harmonics do not have sufficient energy to violate the
requirements.
In order to effectively propagate signals along the length of a track, the track's data
conductors should have a low resistance per unit length, ideally less than that needed to deliver one and one-half volts of signal to all receivers as specified in the RS-485 standard. In a
highly loaded network (with all loads being at the end), this is approximately nine one-
hundredths ohms per foot. This includes the intermediate connectors, so the track conductor's
resistance should ideally be much lower than this figure. The track's inductive effect will also
contribute to signal degradation.
In order to compensate for the inductive effect of the track, limited termination may be
provided at the endpoint of each branch. This termination is preferably not purely resistive,
but rather compensates only for the inductive effect of the track. A circuit design for a
suitable terminator 6008 is shown in Fig. 18. This circuit effectively clamps the voltage
between the data + and data - connections to plus or minus five volts. Any overshoot of the
signal may thus be absorbed by a shunt regulator 6148 of Fig. 18. The terminator 6008
effectively terminates the line, without drawing power constantly from the data lines.
Recovering data from the track then becomes a matter of attaching (using any of the
commonly used attachment methods, e.g., spring clips) to the electrical and mechanical
attachment points of the track itself. Many examples of track lighting attachment are well
known to those of ordinary skill in the art. One example is the Halo Power Track provided by
Cooper Lighting.
Once both the power and data are available on a wire, for example, we can use the
network version of the light modules 100 described above, or any digitally controlled dimmer,
to achieve individual control over the lighting unit. The data can correspond not only to light
intensity, but also to control effects, such as moving a yoke, gobo control, light focus, or the
like. Moreover, the system can be used to control non-lighting devices that are RS-485
compliant. It is further possible, by using this embodiment, to create devices which can respond over the same data conductors or over a separate pair, using substantially similar drivers,
possibly with added circuitry to allow the driver(s) to be electrically disconnected from the
data conductors during times when the device is not selected for a response, i.e., to allow bus
sharing. Units can send status information to the driver, or information can be provided to the
units through other means, such as radio frequency, infrared, acoustic, or other signals.
Referring again to Fig. 17, a circuit design for the data driver 6004 includes a
connector 6012 through which power, which may nominally be positive twelve volts of
unregulated power, is delivered to the data driver 6004. The power may be split into positive
eight and one-half volts of unregulated supply and negative three and one-half volts of regulated supply by a shunt regulator 6014 consisting of a resistor 6016, a resistor 6018, and a
transistor 6020. Decoupling may be provided by capacitors 6022, 6024 and 6028. The shunt
regulator 6014 may be of a standard design familiar to analog circuit designers. The eight and
one-half volt supply is further regulated to produce a five volt supply by a voltage regulator 6030, which may be an LM78L05ACM voltage regulator available from National
Semiconductor Corporation, Santa Clara, California, and may be decoupled by capacitor
6032. The teachings of the data sheet for the LM78L05ACM are incorporated herein by
reference.
The incoming RS-485 data stream may be received by the RS-485 receiver chip 6034
at pins 6038 and 6040. The data stream may be further buffered by the receiver chip 6034 to
produce a clean, amplified true and complement data signals at pins 6042 and 6044,
respectively. These signals are further buffered and inverted by buffer 6048 to produce true
and complement data signals with substantial drive capabilities at pins 6050 and 6052 respectively. Each of these signals is then processed by an output amplifier. There are two
output amplifiers 6054 and 6058, identical in design and function.
Each amplifier 6054 and 6058 draws power from the previously described power
supplies, and both amplifiers share the bias voltage generator network composed of resistors
6060, 6062 and 6064. Amplifier 6054 is composed of all parts to the left of this network on
Fig. 17, while amplifier 6058 is composed of all parts to the right of this bias network. Only
amplifier 6054 will be described, as amplifier 6058 is substantially identical, with the exception
that its input is an inverted copy of the input to amplifier 6054.
The bias network generates two bias voltages, nominally positive six and four-tenths
volts, and negative one and four-tenths volts, appearing at the base of transistors 6068 and
6070, respectively. Transistor 6068 and resistor 6072 form a constant current source 6074,
sourcing a current of approximately twenty milliamps from the collector of transistor 6068. Similarly transistor 6078 and resistor 6080 provide a current sink 6082 to sink a current of
twenty milliamps from the collector of transistor 6078. Diodes 6010, 6084, 6088, 6090, 6092
and 6094 form a current steering network 6098 and steer the twenty milliamp currents
alternately into the incoming data line, or capacitor 6100 (through the one volt shunt regulator
composed of transistor 6102, resistor 6104 and resistor 6108 if the current is from transistor
6068). If the incoming data line switches from the low state of zero volts to the high state of
positive five volts, current sink 6082 will sink current from the incoming data line, through
diodes 6090 and 6092, because the voltage at the anode of 6090 will be greater than the
voltage at the anode of diode 6094. Diodes 6084 and 6088 will be reverse-biased, and current
will flow through 6010 and the shunt regulator 6110 comprised of transistor 6102 and
resistors 6104 and 6108. The circuit node at the anode of diode 6094 will not immediately
follow the transition, as capacitor 6100 must slowly charge from the current provided by transistor 6068. Capacitor 6100 will charge at a rate of approximately six and sixty-seven
hundredths volts per microsecond, and will reach approximately four volts approximately
seven hundred fifty nanoseconds later. At that time the voltage at the collector of transistor
6068 will become large enough to forward bias diodes 6084 and 6088, causing the current
source 6074 to be steered into the input data line. As long as this data line is held in a high
state (at five volts), no more current will flow through diode 6010, the shunt regulator 61 10
and into capacitor 6100. The cathode of diode 6010 will remain at approximately five and
five-tenths volts until the data line changes state to the low state of zero volts. During the
switching as described, transistor 61 12 acts as a common collector current buffer and will
source as much current as is required into resistor 61 14. This current will flow into the output
at pin 6118 of output device 6120. The voltage at the output will thus be a slowly rising
signal, whose slope is regulated by the charging of capacitor 6100 from current source 6074. A small base current will be drawn from transistor 6068 by transistor 6112, but its effect on
the transition timing will be negligible.
When the incoming data line transitions to the low state, diodes 6084, 6088 and 6094
will be forward-biased, diodes 6090, 6092 and 6010 will be reverse-biased, and capacitor 6100
will discharge through diode 6094 through the current sink 6082 at similar rates to the positive
transition described above. Current from current source 6074 will flow into the data line, now
held at zero volts. The voltage at the anode of diode 6094 will reach negative five-tenths
volts, and current will again flow through 6090 and 6092, instead of diode 6094 and transistor
6078, completing the downward transition. During this period transistor 6129 will sink as
much current as necessary through resistor 6128, from the output at pin 61 18 of device 6120,
to cause it to follow the voltage at the anode of diode 6094. A small base current will be
drawn by transistor 6129 from transistor, but its effect on the transition timing will be negligible. Transistors 6130 and 6132 in combination with resistors 61 14 and 6128 protect transistors 61 12 and 6129 respectively in case of a short circuit at the output, limiting the
maximum possible output current (and hence the current through transistors 61 12 and 6130)
to approximately two hundred fifty milliamps.
The wave-shaping performed by this circuit can be implemented by a variety of
different circuits. The embodiment depicted in Fig. 17 is only one example of a circuit for
producing a desirable wave shape. Any circuit which slows the rising and falling transitions of
the data signal can be considered to be an implementation of a wave-shaping circuit as
disclosed herein.
Referring to Fig. 18, the terminating circuit is composed of a bridge rectifier 6134
composed of diodes 6138, 6140, 6142 and 6144 and a shunt regulator 6148 composed of
resistors 6150, 6152 and transistors 6154 and 6158. This circuit is a bi-directional voltage limiter and clamps the voltage between the input terminals at approximately five and three-
tenths volts, regardless of the polarity of the applied input. Both the shunt regulator 6148 and
the bridge rectifier 6134 are of a standard design, known by those familiar with analog circuit
design. Capacitor 6150 improves the transient response of the voltage limiter.
Excess energy stored in a transmission line would normally cause voltage excursions
above five and three-tenths volts. The termination circuit 6008 of Fig. 18 will absorb the
excess energy as it clamps the voltage at the terminus of the transmission line to five and
three-tenths volts. Approximately ninety-five percent of the reflected energy may be absorbed
by the circuit, and the resulting oscillation will be of insignificant amplitude.
The transistors disclosed herein may be of a conventional type, such as those provided
by Zetex. The diodes may be of industry standard type. Buffer 6048 may be of industry standard type, and may be 74HC04 type. The receiver chip 6034 may be a MAX490 receiver
chip made by Maxim Inc. of Sunnyvale, California. Other receiver chips may be used.
The foregoing embodiments may reside in any number of different housings. Turning
now to Fig. 19, there is shown an exploded view of an illumination unit of the present
invention comprising a substantially cylindrical body section 602, a light module 604, a
conductive sleeve 608, a power module 612, a second conductive sleeve 614, and an
enclosure plate 618. It is to be assumed here that the light module 604 and the power module
612 contain the electrical structure and software of light module 100 and power module 200,
described above, or other embodiments of the light module 100 or other power modules
disclosed herein. Screws 622, 624, 626, 628 allow the entire apparatus to be mechanically
connected. Body section 602, conductive sleeves 604 and 614 and enclosure plate 618 are
preferably made from a material that conducts heat, such as aluminum. Body section 602 has
an open end, a reflective interior portion and an illumination end, to which module 604 is
mechanically affixed. Light module 604 is disk-shaped and has two sides. The illumination
side (not shown) comprises a plurality of LEDs of different primary colors. The connection
side holds an electrical connector male pin assembly 632. Both the illumination side and the
connection side are coated with aluminum surfaces to better allow the conduction of heat
outward from the plurality of LEDs to the body section 602. Likewise, power module 612 is
disk shaped and has every available surface covered with aluminum for the same reason.
Power module 612 has a connection side holding an electrical connector female pin assembly
634 adapted to fit the pins from assembly 632. Power module 612 has a power terminal side
holding a terminal 638 for connection to a source of DC power. Any standard AC or DC jack
may be used, as appropriate. Interposed between light module 602 and power module 612 is a conductive aluminum
sleeve 608, which substantially encloses the space between modules 602 and 612 As shown,
a disk-shaped enclosure plate 618 and screws 622, 624, 626 and 628 seal all of the
components together, and conductive sleeve 614 is thus interposed between enclosure plate
618 and power module 612. Once sealed together as a unit, the illumination apparatus may be
connected to a data network as described above and mounted in any convenient manner to
illuminate an area. In operation, preferably a light diffusing means will be inserted in body
section 602 to ensure that the LEDs on light module 604 appear to emit a single uniform beam
of light
Another embodiment of a light module 100 is depicted in Fig. 20 One of the
advantages of the array 37 is that it can be used to construct an LED-based light that
overcomes the problem of the need for different fixtures for different lighting applications. In
particular, in an embodiment of the invention illustrated in Fig. 20, an array of LEDs 644, which can be the circular array 37 depicted in Fig. 8 or another array, may be disposed on a
platform 642 that is constructed to plug into a fixture, such as an MR-16 fixture for a conventional halogen lamp. In other embodiments of the invention, the platform 642 may be
shaped to plug, screw or otherwise connect into a power source with the same configuration
as a conventional light bulb, halogen bulb, or other illumination source. In the embodiment of
Fig. 20, a pair of connectors 646 connect to a power source, such as an electrical wire, in the
same manner as connectors for a conventional halogen bulb in an MR- 16 fixture.
In an embodiment of the invention depicted in Fig. 21, the platform 642 bearing the
LED array 644 can be plugged into a conventional halogen fixture. Thus, without changing
wiring or fixtures, a user can have LED based lights by simply inserting the modular platform
642. The user can return to conventional lights by removing the modular platform 642 and installing a conventional halogen bulb or other illumination source. Thus, the user can use the
same fixtures and wiring for a wide variety of lighting applications, including the LED system
120, in the various embodiments disclosed herein.
Referring to Fig. 22, a schematic is provided for a circuit design for a light module 100
suitable for inclusion in a modular platform, such as the platform 642 of Fig. 20. An LED
array 644 consists of green, blue and red LEDs. A processor 16 provides functions similar to
the processor 16 described in connection with Fig. 6. Data input pin 20 provides data and
power to the processor 16. An oscillator 19 provides clock functions. The light module 100
includes other circuit elements for permitting the processor 16 to convert incoming electrical
signals that are formatted according to a control protocol, such as a DMX-512 protocol, into
control signals for the LEDs of the array 644 in a manner similar to that disclosed in
connection with other embodiments disclosed above.
In a further embodiment of the invention, depicted in Fig. 23, a modular platform 648
is provided on which a digitally controlled array 37 of LEDs 15, which may be an LED system
120 of a light module 100 according to the other embodiments disclosed herein, is disposed.
The modular platform 648 may be made of clear plastic or similar material, so that the
platform 648 is illuminated to whatever color is provided by the array 37. The modular
platform 648 may include extrusions 652 and intrusions 654, so that modular blocks can be
formed that interconnect to form a variety of three-dimensional shapes. A wall, floor, ceiling,
or other object can be constructed of blocks, with each block being illuminated to a different
color by that block's array 37 of LEDs 15. The blocks 648 can be interconnected. Such an
object can be used to create signage; that is, the individual blocks of such an object can be
illuminated in the form of symbols, such as letters, numbers, or other designs. For example, a
wall can be used as a color display or sign. Many different shapes of modular blocks 648 can be envisioned, as can many different interlocking mechanisms. In fact, light modules 100 may
be disposed in a variety of different geometric configurations and associated with a variety of
lighting environments, as further disclosed herein.
In another embodiment of the present invention, an arrayed LED is mounted on a pan
or tilt platform, in a manner similar to conventional theater lights. Known robotic lights shine
a conventionally produced light beam from a bulb or tube onto a pan or tilt mirror. The
arrayed LEDs of the present invention may be placed directly on the pan or tilt platform,
avoiding the necessity of precisely aligning the light source with the pan or tilt mirror. Thus,
an adjustable pan/tilt beam effect may be obtained similar to a mirror-based beam, without the
mirror. This embodiment permits pan/tilt beam effects in more compact spaces than
previously possible, because there is not a need for a separation between the source and the mirror.
Also provided is an LED based construction tile, through which a wall, floor or ceiling
may be built that includes an ability to change color or intensity in a manner controlled by a
microprocessor. The tile may be based on modularity similar to toy plastic building blocks.
Multicolor tiles can be used to create a multicolor dance floor or shower, or a floor, wall or
bathroom tile.
Also provided is a modular lighting system which allows the creation of various
illuminating shapes based on a limited number of subshapes. In this embodiment of the present
invention, a plurality of light emitting squares (or other geometric shapes) may be arranged
into larger shapes in one, two or three dimensions. The modular blocks could communicate
through physical proximity or attachment. Modular multicolor lighting blocks can be
configured into different formats and shapes. As described above, embodiments of the present invention may be utilized in a variety
of manners. By way of examples, the following discussion provides different environments
within which the LEDs of the present invention may be adapted for lighting and/or
illumination.
Looking now at Fig. 24, a modular LED unit 4000, is provided for illumination within
an environment. Modular unit 4000 comprises a light module 4002, similar to item 120
discussed in connection with Fig. 1, and a processor 4004, similar to item 16 discussed in
connection with Fig. 1. The light module 4002 may include, as illustrated in Fig. 25, an LED
4006 having a plurality of color-emitting semiconductor dies 4008 for generating a range of
radiation within a spectrum, for example, a range of frequencies within the visible spectrum.
Each color-emitting die 4008 preferably represents a primary color and is capable of
individually generating a primary color of varying intensity. When combined, the primary colors from each of dies 4008 can produce a particular color within the color spectrum. The
processor 4004, on the other hand, may be provided for controlling an amount of electrical
current supplied to each of the semiconductor die 4008. Depending on the amount of
electrical current supplied to each die, a primary color of a certain intensity may be emitted
therefrom. Accordingly, by controlling the intensity of the primary color produced from each
die, the processor 4004, in essence, can control the particular color illuminated from the LED
4006. Although Fig. 25 shows three color-emitting semiconductor dies 4002, it should be
appreciated that the use of at least two color emitting dies may generate a range of radiation
within a spectrum.
The modular unit 4000 may further include a mechanism (not shown) for facilitating
communication between a generator of control signals and the light module 4002. In one
embodiment, the mechanism may include a separate transmitter and receiver, as discussed above in connection with Fig. 2. However, it should be appreciated that the transmitter and
receiver may be combined into one mechanism. The modular unit 4000 may also include a
power module 4010, as discussed in connection with Fig. 9, for providing an electrical current
from a power source, for example, an electrical outlet or a battery, to the light module 4002.
To permit electrical current to be directed from the power module 4010 to the light module
4002, an electrical connector, similar to complementary male pin set 632 and female pin set
634 in Fig. 19, may be provided. In this manner, the electrical connector may be designed to
removably couple the light module 4002 to the power module 4010.
In an alternate embodiment, the light module 4002, as shown in Fig. 26, may include a
plurality of LEDs 4006 illustrated in Fig. 25. Each LED 4006 may be part of a light module
4002, which may be provided with a data communication link 4014, similar to item 500
described above in connection with Fig. 2, for communication with a control signal generator, or, in certain embodiments of the invention, with other light modules 4002. In this manner,
data such as the amount of electrical current controlled by processor 4004 may be supplied to
the plurality of semiconductor dies 4008 in each of the LEDs 4006, so that a particular color
may be generated.
In another embodiment, the light module 4002, as shown in Fig. 27, may include a
plurality of conventional light emitting diodes (LEDs) 4016. The conventional LEDs 4016
may be representative of primary colors red, blue and green. Thus, when the primary color
from each of the LED 4016 is generated, the combination of a plurality of LEDs 4016 can
produce any frequency within a spectrum. It should be understood, that similar to the
semiconductor dies 4008, the intensity and/or illumination of each LED 4016 may be varied by
processor 4004 to obtain a range of frequencies within a spectrum. To facilitate communication amongst the plurality of LEDs 4016 and with the processor 4004, data
communication link 4014 may be provided.
The modular LED unit 4000, in certain embodiments, may be interconnected to form
larger lighting assemblies. In particular, the light module 4002 may include LEDs 4006 or
4016 arranged linearly in series within a strip 4020 (Fig. 28 A). The LEDs 4006 or 4016 may
also be arranged within a two dimensional geometric panel 4022 (Fig. 28B) or to represent a
three-dimensional structure 4024 (Fig. 28C). It should be appreciated that the strip 4020, the
geometric panel 4022 or the three-dimensional structure 4024 need not adhere to any
particular design, and may be flexible, so as to permit the light module 4002 to conform to an
environment within which it is placed.
In one embodiment of the invention, the strip 4020, the geometric panel 4022 and the
three-dimensional structure 4024 may be provided with a coupling mechanism (not shown) to
permit coupling between modular LED units 4000. Specifically, the coupling mechanism may
permit a plurality of strips 4020 to be stringed together, or a plurality of geometric panels 4022 to be connected to one another, or a plurality of three-dimensional structures 4024 to be
coupled to one another. The coupling mechanism may also be designed to permit
interconnection of one of a strip 4020, a geometric panel 4022, and a three-dimensional
structure 4024 to another of a strip 4020, a geometric panel 4022, and a three-dimensional
structure 4024. The coupling mechanism can permit either mechanical coupling or electrical
coupling between the modular LED units 4000, but preferably permits both electrical and
physical coupling between the modular LED units 4000. By providing an electrical connection
between the modular LED units 4000, power and data signals may be directed to and between
the modular LED units 4000. Moreover, such connection permits power and data to be
provided at one central location for distribution to all of the modular LED units 4000. In an embodiment of the invention, data may be multiplexed with the power signals in order to reduce the number of electrical connections between the modular LED units 4000. The
mechanical coupling, on the other hand, may simply provide means to securely connect the
modular LED units 4000 to one another, and such function may be inherent through the
provision of an electrical connection.
The modular LED unit 4000 of the present invention may be designed to be either a
"smart" or "dumb" unit. A smart unit, in one embodiment, includes a microprocessor
incorporated therein for controlling, for example, a desired illumination effect produced by the
LEDs. The smart units may communicate with one another and/or with a master controller by
way of a network formed through the mechanism for electrical connection described above. It
should be appreciated that a smart unit can operate in a stand-alone mode, and, if necessary,
one smart unit may act as a master controller for other modular LED units 4000. A dumb
unit, on the other hand, does not include a microprocessor and cannot communicate with other LED units. As a result, a dumb unit cannot operate in a stand-alone mode and requires a
separate master controller.
The modular LED unit 4000 may be used for illumination within a range of diverse
environments. The manner in which the LED unit may be used includes initially placing the
modular LED unit 4000 having a light module 4002, such as those provided in Figs. 25-27,
within an environment, and subsequently controlling the amount of electrical current to at least
one LED, so that a particular amount of current supplied thereto (i.e., the semiconductor dies
4008 or the plurality of conventional LEDs) generates a corresponding frequency within a
spectrum, for instance, the visible spectrum.
An environment within which the modular LED unit 4000 may illuminate includes a
handheld flashlight 4029 (Fig. 29) or one which requires the use of an indicator light. Examples of an environment which uses an indicator light include, but are not limited to, an
elevator floor button, an elevator floor indication display or panel, an automobile dashboard,
an automobile ignition key area, an automobile anti-theft alarm light indicator, individual units
of a stereo systems, a telephone pad button 4030 (Fig. 30), an answering machine message
indicator, a door bell button, a light status switch, a computer status indicator, a video monitor
status indicator, and a watch. Additional environments within which the modular LED unit
4000 may illuminate can include (i) a device to be worn on a body, examples of which include,
an article of jewelry, an article of clothing, shoes, eyeglasses, gloves and a hat, (ii) a toy,
examples of which include, a light wand 4031 (Fig. 31), a toy police car, fire truck, ambulance,
and a musical box, and (iii) a hygienic product, examples of which include, a tooth brush 4032
(Fig. 32) and a shaver.
In accordance with another embodiment of the invention, a modular LED unit 4000 having a plurality of LEDs 4006 or 4016 arranged linearly in series within a strip 4020 may be
also be used for illumination within an environment. One such environment, illustrated in Fig.
33, includes a walkway 4033, for instance, an airplane aisle, a fashion show walkway or a
hallway. When used in connection with a walkway, at least one strip 4020 of LEDs 4006 or
4016 may be positioned along one side of the walkway 4033 for use as a directional indicator.
Another such environment, illustrated in Fig. 34, includes a cove 4034. When used in
connection with a cove, at least one strip 4020 of LEDs 4006 or 4016 may be positioned
adjacent the cove 4034, such that the strip of LEDs may illuminate the cove. In one
embodiment, the strip 4020 of LEDs 4006 or 4016 may be placed within a housing 40345,
which housing is then placed adjacent the cove 4034.
Another such environment, illustrated in Fig. 35, includes a handrail 4035. When used
in connection with a handrail, such as that in a dark movie theater, at least one strip 4020 of LEDs 4006 or 4016 may be positioned on a surface of the handrail 4035 to direct a user to the
location of the handrail.
Another such environment, illustrated in Fig. 36, includes a plurality of steps 4036 on a
stairway. When used in connection with a plurality of steps, at least on strip 4020 of LEDs
4006 or 4016 is positioned at an edge of a step 4036, so that at night or in the absence of
light, a user may be informed of the location of the step.
Another environment, illustrated in Fig. 37, includes a toilet bowl 4037. When used in
connection with a toilet bowl, at least one strip 4020 of LEDs 4006 or 4016 may be positioned
about a rim of the bowl 4037 or the seat 40375, so that in the absence of light in the
bathroom, a user may be informed of the location of the bowl or the seat.
Another environment, illustrated in Fig. 38, includes an elevated brake light 4038
located in the rear of an automobile. When used in connection with an elevated brake light, at
least one strip 4020 of LEDs 4006 or 4016 may be positioned within a previously provided
housing 40385 for the brake light. Another environment, illustrated in Fig. 39, includes a refrigerator door 4039. When
used in connection with a refrigerator door, at least one strip 4020 of LEDs 4006 or 4016 may
be positioned on a refrigerator door handle 40395, so that in the absence of light in, for
example, the kitchen, a user may quickly locate the handle for opening the refrigerator door 4039.
Another environment, illustrated in Fig. 40, includes a tree 4040. When used in
connection with a tree, at least one strip 4020 of LEDs 4006 or 4016 may be positioned on the
tree 4040, so as to permit illumination thereof. The tree 4040 could be a Christmas tree or
other ornamental tree, such as an artificial white Christmas tree. By strobing the LEDs 4006
between different colors, the tree 4040 can be caused to change color. Another environment, illustrated in Fig. 41, includes a building 4041. When used in
connection with a building, at least one strip 4020 of LEDs 4006 or 4016 may be positioned
along a surface of the building 4041, so that illumination of the LEDs may attract attention
from an observer. In accordance with another embodiment of the invention, a modular LED unit 4000
having a plurality of LEDs 4006 or 4016 arranged within a geometric panel 4022 may be also
be used for illumination within an environment. One such environment, illustrated in Fig. 42,
includes a floor 4042. When used in connection with a floor, at least one geometric panel
4022 of LEDs 4006 or 4016 may be positioned within at least one designated area in the floor
4042 to provide illumination thereof.
Another environment within which a geometric panel 4022 of LEDs 4006 or 4016 may be used includes a ceiling 4043, as illustrated in Fig. 43. When used in connection with a
ceiling, at least one geometric panel 4022 may be positioned within at least one designated
area on the ceiling 4043 to provide illumination thereof.
Another environment within which a geometric panel 4022 of LEDs 4006 or 4016 may
be used includes a vending machine 4044, as illustrated in Fig. 44. When used in connection
with a vending machine, at least one geometric panel 4022 may be positioned posterior to a
frontal display 40445 of the vending machine, so as to provide illumination of illustration on
the frontal display. Another environment within which a geometric panel 4022 of LEDs 4006 or 4016 may
be used includes an illuminating surface 4045, as illustrated in Fig. 45. When used in
connection with an illuminating surface 4045, at least one geometric panel 4022 may be
positioned posterior to the surface to provide illumination of a graphical illustration on the
surface or illumination of an object placed on the surface. Examples of such an illuminating surface may include an advertisement sign of the type typically seen at an airport, or a transparent surface of a stand 40455 for displaying an object 40458.
Another environment within which a geometric panel 4022 of LEDs 4006 or 4016 may
be used includes a displayment sign 4046, as illustrated in Fig. 46. When used in connection
with a displayment sign, such as a billboard or a advertisement board, at least one geometric
panel 4022 may be positioned within a housing 40465 located, for example, in front of the sign
to provide illumination of illustration thereon.
Another environment within which a geometric panel 4022 of LEDs 4006 or 4016 may
be used includes a traffic light 4047 , as illustrated in Fig. 47. When used in connection with a
traffic light, at least one geometric panel 4022 may be positioned within a housing 40475 for
at least one of the lights. It should be noted that on a conventional traffic light, a geometric panel 4022 may be needed for each of the three lights. However, since the modular LED unit
of the present invention may generate a range of colors, including red, yellow and green, it
may be that a new traffic light might be designed to include placement for only one modular
LED unit. A variety of different colors could be provided within each signal light, so that an adequate signal is provided for different users, including those with red/green color blindness.
Another environment within which a geometric panel 4022 of LEDs 4006 or 4016 may
be used includes a directional display sign 4048, as illustrated in Fig. 48. When used in
connection with a directional display sign, at least one geometric panel 4022 may be
positioned within a housing 40485 for the directional display sign.
Another environment within which a geometric panel 4022 of LEDs 4006 or 4016 may
be used includes an information board 4049, as illustrated in Fig. 49. When used in
connection with an information board, at least one geometric panel 4022 may be positioned on
a front side of the board 4049, so that informational data may be provided to the reader. In one embodiment of the invention, the information board includes, but is not limited to, a traffic
information sign, a silent radio 40495, a scoreboard, a price board, an electronic advertisement
board, and a large public television screen.
In accordance with another embodiment of the invention, a modular LED unit 4000
having a plurality of LEDs 4006 or 4016, arranged to represent a three-dimensional structure
4024, may be also be used for illumination within an environment. One such environment,
illustrated in Fig. 50, includes a toy construction block 4050. When used in connection with a
toy construction block, at least one three-dimensional structure 4024 of LEDs 4006 or 4016
may be positioned on or within the toy construction block 4050 to provide illumination
thereof. It should be appreciated that the three-dimensional structure of LEDs can be design to represent any desired three-dimensional object.
A further environment within which the three-dimensional structure 4024 of LEDs
4006 or 4016 may be utilized includes, as shown in Fig. 51, an ornamental display 4051.
Since the three-dimensional structure 4024 of LEDs, as indicated, can be designed to
represent any three-dimensional object, the structure may be formed into the ornamental
display 4051 of interest, so that illumination of the LEDs provides an illuminated
representation of the object. Examples of an ornamental display 4051 can include a Christmas
tree ornament, an animal-shaped figure, a discotheque ball 40515, or any natural or man-made
object capable of being represented.
A further environment within which the three-dimensional structure 4024 of LEDs
4006 or 4016 may be utilized includes an architectural glass block 4052, as shown in Fig. 52,
or large letters 4053, as shown in Fig. 53. To utilize the three-dimensional structure 4024 in
connection with the glass block, at least one three-dimensional structure 4024 may be
positioned within the glass block 4052 for illumination thereof. To utilize the three- dimensional structure 4024 in connection with the large letter 4053, at least one three- dimensional structure 4024 may be positioned on the letter, or if the letter 4053 is transparent,
within the letter.
A further environment within which the three-dimensional structure 4024 of LEDs
4006 or 4016 may be utilized includes a traditional lighting device 4054, as shown in Fig. 54.
To utilize the three-dimensional structure 4024 in connection with the traditional lighting
device 4054, at least one three-dimensional structure 4024, in the shape of, for example, a
conventional light bulb 40545, may be positioned within a socket for receiving the
conventional light bulb.
A further environment within which the three-dimensional structure 4024 of LEDs
4006 or 4016 may be utilized includes a warning tower 4055, as shown in Fig. 55. To utilize
the three-dimensional structure 4024 in connection with the warning tower, at least one three-
dimensional structure 4024 may be positioned on the tower 4055 to act as a warning indicator
to high flying planes or distantly located vessels. A further environment within which the three-dimensional structure 4024 of LEDs
4006 or 4016 may be utilized includes a buoy 4056, as shown in Fig. 56. To utilize the three-
dimensional structure 4024 in connection with the buoy, at least one three-dimensional
structure 4024 may be positioned on the buoy 4056 for illumination thereof.
A further environment within which the three-dimensional structure 4024 of LEDs
4006 or 4016 may be utilized includes a ball 4057 or puck 40571, as shown in Fig. 57. To
utilize the three-dimensional structure 4024 in connection with the ball or puck, at least one
three-dimensional structure 4024 may be positioned within the ball 4057 or puck 40571 to
enhance visualization of the ball or puck. In accordance with another embodiment of the invention, two or more of the modular
LED unit 4000 having a plurality of LEDs 4006 or 4016, arranged linearly in a strip 4020, in a
geometric panel 4022 or as a three-dimensional structure 4024, may be used for illumination
within an environment. One such environment, illustrated in Fig. 58, includes an ornamental
display 4058. When used in connection with an ornamental display, at least one strip 4020 of
LEDs 4006 or 4016 and one of a geometric panel 4022 and three-dimensional structure 4024
of LEDs 4006 or 4016 may be positioned along a surface to provide illumination of the
ornamental display. Examples of an ornamental display 4058 can include a Christmas tree
ornament 40585, an animal-shaped figure, a discotheque ball, or any natural or man-made
object capable of being represented.
Another such environment, illustrated in Fig. 59, includes a bowling alley 4059. When used in connection with a bowling alley, one of a strip 4020, a geometric panel 4022, and a
three-dimensional structure 4024 of LEDs 4006 or 4016 may be positioned along a lane
40595, and one of a strip 4020, a geometric panel 4022, and a three-dimensional structure
4024 of LEDs 4006 or 4016 may be positioned on a ceiling, a floor or a wall of the bowling
alley.
Another such environment, illustrated in Fig. 60, includes a theatrical setting. When
used in connection with a theatrical setting, one of a strip 4020, a geometric panel 4022, and a
three-dimensional structure 4024 of LEDs 4006 or 4016 may be positioned on a ceiling, a
floor, or a wall of a theater 4060, and one of a strip 4020, a geometric panel 4022, and a
three-dimensional structure 4024 of LEDs 4006 or 4016 may be positioned on the remainder
of the ceiling, the floor or the wall of the theater.
Another such environment, illustrated in Fig. 61, includes a swimming pool 4061.
When used in connection with a swimming pool, one of a strip 4020, a geometric panel 4022, and a three-dimensional structure 4024 of LEDs 4006 or 4016 may be positioned on a floor or
a wall of the swimming pool 4061, and one of a strip 4020, a geometric panel 4022, and a
three-dimensional structure 4024 of LEDs 4006 or 4016 may be positioned on the other of the
floor or the wall of the swimming pool.
Another such environment, illustrated in Fig. 62, includes a cargo bay 4062 of a
spacecraft 40625. When used in connection with the cargo bay of a spacecraft, one of a strip
4020, a geometric panel 4022, and a three-dimensional structure 4024 of LEDs 4006 or 4016
may be positioned on a ceiling, a floor, or a wall of the cargo bay 4062, and one of a strip
4020, a geometric panel 4022, and a three-dimensional structure 4024 of LEDs 4006 or 4016
may be positioned on the remainder of the ceiling, the floor or the wall of the cargo bay 4062.
Another such environment, illustrated in Fig. 63, includes an aircraft hangar 4063.
When used in connection with an aircraft hangar, one of a strip 4020, a geometric panel 4022,
and a three-dimensional structure 4024 of LEDs 4006 or 4016 may be positioned on a ceiling,
a floor, or a wall of the hangar 4063, and one of a one of a strip 4020, a geometric panel 4022,
and a three-dimensional structure 4024 of LEDs 4006 or 4016 may be positioned on the
remainder of the ceiling, the floor or the wall of the hangar.
Another such environment, illustrated in Fig. 64, includes a warehouse 4064. When
used in connection with a warehouse, one of a strip 4020, a geometric panel 4022, and a
three-dimensional structure 4024 of LEDs 4006 or 4016 may be positioned on a ceiling, a
floor, or a wall of the warehouse 4064, and one of a one of a strip 4020, a geometric panel
4022, and a three-dimensional structure 4024 of LEDs 4006 or 4016 may be positioned on the
remainder of the ceiling, the floor or the wall of the warehouse.
Another such environment, illustrated in Fig. 65, includes a subway station 4065.
When used in connection with a subway station, one of a strip 4020, a geometric panel 4022, and a three-dimensional structure 4024 of LEDs 4006 or 4016 may be positioned on a ceiling, a floor, or a wall of the subway station 4065, and one of a one of a strip 4020, a geometric
panel 4022, and a three-dimensional structure 4024 of LEDs 4006 or 4016 may be positioned
on the remainder of the ceiling, the floor or the wall of the subway station.
Another such environment, illustrated in Fig. 66, includes a marina 6066. When used
in connection with a marina, one of a strip 4020, a geometric panel 4022, and a three-
dimensional structure 4024 of LEDs 4006 or 4016 may be positioned on a buoy 40662, a
dock 40664, a light fixture 40666, or a boathouse 40668, and one of a one of a strip 4020, a
geometric panel 4022, and a three-dimensional structure 4024 of LEDs 4006 or 4016 may be
positioned on the remainder of the buoy, the dock, the light fixture, or the boathouse.
Another such environment, illustrated in Fig. 67, includes a fireplace 4067. When used
in connection with a fireplace, one of a strip 4020, a geometric panel 4022, and a three-
dimensional structure 4024 of LEDs 4006 or 4016 may be positioned on a simulated fire log
40675, a wall, or a floor of the fireplace 4067, and one of a one of a strip 4020, a geometric panel 4022, and a three-dimensional structure 4024 of LEDs 4006 or 4016 may be positioned
on the remainder of the simulated log, the wall, or the floor of the fireplace, such that when
frequencies within the spectrum are generated, an appearance of fire is simulated.
Another such environment, illustrated in Fig. 68, includes an underside 4068 of a car
40685. When used in connection with the underside of a car, one of a strip 4020, a geometric
panel 4022, and a three-dimensional structure 4024 of LEDs 4006 or 4016 may be positioned
on the underside of the car to permit illumination of a road surface over which the car passes.
Although certain specific embodiments of the light module 4002 in the modular LED
unit 4000 have been discussed in connection with particular environments, it should be
understood that it would be apparent to those of skilled in the art to use light modules similar to those discussed within many different environments, as well as combinations of light
module and environment not yet discussed, but readily conceivable.
From the foregoing, it will be appreciated that PWM current control of LEDs to
produce multiple colors may be incorporated into countless environments, with or without
networks. Certain embodiments of the invention are described herein, but it should be
understood that other embodiments are within the scope of the invention.
Another use of the present invention is as a light bulb. Using appropriate rectifier and
voltage transformation means, the entire power and light modules may be placed in any
traditional lightbulb housing, such as an Edison-mount (screw-type) light bulb housing. Each
bulb can be programmed with particular register values to deliver a particular color bulb,
including white. The current regulator can be preprogrammed to give a desired current rating
and thus preset light intensity. Naturally, the lightbulb may have a transparent or translucent
section that allows the passage of light into the ambient.
Referring to Fig. 69, in one embodiment of the invention a smart light bulb 701 is
provided. The smart light bulb may include a housing 703 in which are disposed a processor
705 and an illumination source 707. The housing may include a connector 709 for connection
to a power source. The connection may also serve as a connection to a data source, such as
the data connection 500 disclosed in connection with certain other embodiments herein. The
processor may be a processor 16 such as that disclosed elsewhere herein. The smart light bulb
701 may form one embodiment of a light module 100 that may be used in the various
embodiments disclosed or encompassed herein.
In an embodiment the housing 703 may be configured to resemble the shape of housing
for a conventional illumination source, such as a halogen light bulb. In one embodiment,
depicted in Fig. 69, connector 709 is configured to fit into a conventional halogen socket, and the illumination source 707 is an LED system, such as the LED system 120 disclosed above in
connection with Fig. 1.
Processor 705 may be similar to the processor 16 disclosed in connection with the
discussion of Fig. 1 above and further described elsewhere herein. That is, in one embodiment
of the invention, the smart light bulb 701 consists of a light module 100 such as that disclosed
above. However, it should be understood that the smart light bulb may take a variety of other
configurations. For example, the housing 703 could be shaped to resemble an incandescent
light bulb, in which case the connector 709 could be a set of threads for screwing into a
conventional incandescent light slot, and the illumination source 707 could be an incandescent
light source. The housing 703 could be configured to resemble any conventional light bulb or
fixture, such as a headlamp, a flashlight bulb, an alarm light, a traffic light, or the like. In fact,
the housing 703 could take any geometric configuration appropriate for a particular
illumination or display environment.
The processor 705 may be used to control the intensity of the illumination source, the
color of the illumination source 707 and other features or elements included in the housing 703
that are capable of control by a processor. In an embodiment of the invention the processor
705 controls the illumination source 707 to produce any color in the spectrum, to strobe
rapidly between different colors, and to otherwise produce any desired illumination condition.
Illumination sources that could disposed in a housing 703 and made subject to the processor
705 could include any type of illumination source, including the range of such sources
disclosed above.
In an embodiment of the invention depicted in Fig. 70, the smart light bulb 701 may be
equipped with a receiver 71 1 and/or a transmitter 713, which may be connected to the
processor 705. The receiver 71 1 may be capable of receiving data signals and relaying them to the processor 705. It should be understood that the receiver 71 1 may be merely an interface to a circuit or network connection, or may be a separate component capable of receiving other
signals. Thus, the receiver may receive signals by a data connection 715 from another device
717. In an embodiment of the invention, the other device is a laptop computer, the data
connection is a DMX data track, and the data is sent according to the DMX-512 protocol to
the smart light bulb 701. Processor 705 then processes the data to control the illumination
source 707 in a manner similar to that described above in connection with other embodiments
of the invention. The transmitter 713 may be controlled by the processor 705 to transmit the
data from the smart light bulb 701 over the data connection 715 to another device 717. The
other device may be another smart light bulb 701, a light module 100 such as disclosed above, or any other device capable of receiving a signal data connection 715. Thus, the data
connection 715 could be any connection of among the types disclosed above. That is, any use
of the electromagnetic spectrum or other energy transmission mechanism for the
communication link could provide the data connection 715 between the smart light bulb 701 and another device 717. The other device 717 could be any device capable of receiving and
responding to data, such as an alarm system, a VCR, a television, an entertainment device, a
computer, an appliance, or the like.
Referring to Fig. 71, the smart light bulb 701 could be part of a collection of smart
light bulbs similarly configured. One smart light bulb could through use of the transmitter 71 1
transmit data to the receiver 713 of one or more other smart light bulbs 701. In this manner, a
plurality of smart light bulbs 701 may be established in a master/slave arrangement, whereby
the master smart light bulb 701 controls the operation of one or more other slave smart light
bulbs 701. The data connection 715 between the smart light bulbs 701 could be any type of
data connection 715, including any of those described in connection with Fig. 70. The smart light bulb 701 may be part of a network of such smart light bulbs 701 as depicted in Fig. 72. Through use of the transmitter 71 1 and the receiver 713 of each of the
smart light bulbs 701, as well as the processor 705, each smart light bulb 701 in a network 718
may send and receive queries over a data connection 715 similar to that disclosed in
connection with the description of Fig. 70. Thus, the smart light bulb 701 can determine the
configuration of the network in which the smart light bulb 701 is contained. For example, the
smart light bulb 701 can process signals from another smart light bulb 701 to determine which
of the light bulbs is the master and which is the slave in a master/slave relationship.
Additional processing capabilities may be included in each smart light bulb 701. For
example, each smart light bulb 701 may be made responsive to an external data signal for illumination control. For example, in the embodiment depicted in Fig. 73, a light sensor 719
may be disposed in proximity to a window 722 for sensing external illumination conditions.
The light sensor 719 may detect changes in the external illumination conditions and send a signal 723 to one or more smart light bulbs 701 to alter the illumination in an interior space
725, to compensate for or otherwise respond to the external illumination conditions sensed by
the light sensor 719. Thus, the room lights in the exterior space 725 can be made to turn on
or change color at sunrise or sunset, in response to changes in the external illumination
conditions at those times. The light sensor 719 could also be made to measure the color
temperature and intensity of the external environment and to send a signal 723 that instructs
the light module 701 to produce a similar color temperature and intensity. Thus, the room
lights could mimic an external sunset with an internal sunset in the internal space 725. Thus,
the smart light bulb 701 maybe used in a wide variety of sensor and feedback applications as
disclosed in connection with other embodiments described herein. Referring to Fig. 74, in another embodiment a plurality of smart light bulbs 701 may be
disposed on a data network 727. The data network may carry signals from a control device
729. The control device may be any device capable of sending a signal to a data network 727.
The control device in the embodiment depicted in Fig. 74 is an electrocardiogram (EKG)
machine. The EKG machine 729 has a plurality of sensors 731 that measure the electrical
activity of the heart of a patient 733. The EKG machine 729 may be programmed to send
control data over the network 727 to the smart light bulb 701 in instances in which the EKG
machine 729 measures particular states of the electrical activity measured by the sensors 731.
Thus, for example, the light bulbs could illuminate with a particular color, such as green, for
normal cardiac activity, but could change to a different color to reflect particular cardiac
problems. For example, arrhythmia could be reflected by a flashing red illumination signal to
the smart light bulb 701, a rapid pulse could be reflected by a yellow signal to the smart light
bulbs 701, or the like.
A smart light bulb such as depicted in Fig. 70 can be programmed to operate in a stand
alone mode as well. Thus, preprogrammed instructions may cause the smart light bulb 701 to
change colors at intensities in a designed way; thus, the light may be designed to shine a particular color at a particular time of day, or the like. The smart light bulb 701 may also
include algorithms for altering the illumination from the smart light bulb 701 to reflect the state
of the smart light bulb 701. For example, the light bulb could display a particular illumination
pattern if the LED system 707 is near the end of its life, if there is a problem with the power
supply, or the like.
The present invention may be used as a general indicator of any given environmental
condition. Fig. 75 shows the general functional block diagram for such an apparatus. Shown
within Fig. 75 is also an exemplary chart showing the duty cycles of the three color LEDs during an exemplary period. As one example of an environmental indicator, the power module can be coupled to an inclinometer. The inclinometer measures general angular orientation
with respect to the earth's center of gravity. The inclinometer's angle signal can be converted
through an A/D converter and coupled to the data inputs of the processor 16 in the power
module. The processor 16 can then be programmed to assign each discrete angular
orientation a different color through the use of a lookup table associating angles with LED
color register values. Another indicator use is to provide an easily readable visual temperature
indication. For example, a digital thermometer can be connected to provide the processor 16
a temperature reading. Each temperature will be associated with a particular set of register
values, and hence a particular color output. A plurality of such "color thermometers" can be
located over a large space, such as a storage freezer, to allow simple visual inspection of
temperature over three dimensions.
In another embodiment of the invention, the signal-generating device may be a detector
of ambient conditions, such as a light meter or thermometer. Thus, lighting conditions may be
varied in accordance with ambient conditions. For example, arrayed LEDs may be
programmed to increase room light as the external light entering the room from the sun
diminishes at the end of the day. LEDs may be programmed to compensate for changes in
color temperature as well, through a feedback mechanism.
When coupled to transducers, many embodiments of the present invention are possible
that associate some ambient condition with an LED system. As used herein, the term
"transducer" should be understood to encompass all methods and systems for converting a
physical quantity into an electrical signal. Electrical signals, in turn, can be manipulated by
electronic circuits, digitized by analog to digital converters, and sent for processing to a processor, such as a microcontroller or microprocessor. The processor could then send out information to dictate the characteristics of the light emitted by the LED system of the present invention. In such manner, physical conditions of the environment involving external forces,
temperature, particle number, and electromagnetic radiation, for example, can be made to
correspond to a particular LED system. We also note that other systems involving liquid
crystal, fluorescence, and gas discharge could also be used.
In a specific embodiment, a temperature transducer such as a thermocouple,
thermistor, or integrated circuit (IC) temperature sensor and the light module 100 of the
present invention can be used to make a color thermometer. As mentioned above, such a
thermometer would emit a particular set of colors from the LED system to indicate the
ambient temperature. Thus the inside of an oven or freezer having such an LED system could
emit different colored lights to indicate when certain temperatures have been reached.
Fig. 76 shows a general block diagram relevant to the color thermometer. Item 1000 is
an IC temperature sensor like the LM335. This is a two-terminal temperature sensor with an
accuracy of approximately ±1 °C over the range -55°C to 125°C. Further information
pertaining to the LM335 may be found in the monograph The Art of Electronics, by Paul
Horowitz and Winfield Hill. The entire disclosure of such monograph is hereby incorporated.
Item 1001 is an analog to digital (A/D) converter that converts the voltage signal from the IC
temperature sensor to binary information. As mentioned above, this is fed to a microcontroller
or microprocessor 1002 such as a MICROCHIP brand PIC16C63 or other processor, such as
the processor 16 mentioned above. Output from the microcontroller or microprocessor 1002
proceeds to a switch 1003 which can be a high current/voltage Darlington driver, part no.
DS2003, available from the National Semiconductor Corporation, Santa Clara, California as
mentioned above. Element 1003 switches current from LED system 1004. Shown within Fig. 76 as item 1009 is also an exemplary chart showing the duty cycles of the three color LEDs during an exemplary period.
The enlargement of Fig. 76 is a general diagram that is also applicable to other
embodiments that follow. Each of these embodiments are similar to the extent that they
associate the different environmental conditions mentioned above with an LED system. The
different embodiments differ from each other because they possess different transducers
appropriate to the environmental condition that is being indicated. Thus, in the embodiments
that follow, the temperature sensor 1000 is replaced by another appropriate transducer.
The power module (not shown in Fig. 76) can be included in the color thermometer.
The signal from the temperature transducer 1000 can be converted by the A/D converter 1001 and coupled to the data inputs of the microcontroller 1002 in the power module. The
microcontroller can then be programmed to assign a range of temperatures to a different color
through the use of a lookup table associating temperatures with LED color register values.
In another specific embodiment, a force transducer such as a differential transformer, strain gauge, or piezoelectric device and the LED system of the present invention can be used
to associate a range of forces with a corresponding LED system. Fig. 77 shows a color
speedometer 1010 having a force transducer 101 1, such as a linear variable differential
transformer (LVDT), coupled to an A/D converter 1017 which is in turn coupled to an LED
system 1012 of the present invention. A housing 1013 encloses the force transducer 1011 and
the LED system 1012. The housing possesses a fastener to affix the housing and contents to a
rotating object like a bicycle wheel 1015. The fastener shown in Fig. 77 is a clamp 1016,
although other fasteners such as screws, or rivets could also be used that permit the color
speedometer to become affixed to a wheel rim 1018. Such a color speedometer 1010 could be used to "see" the angular speed of various
rotating objects. Thus, as in the example of Fig. 77, the LED system 1012 coupled to the force
transducer 101 1 could be mounted to the bicycle wheel 1015 at a distance r from the center of
the wheel 1015. A reference mass m in the transducer (not shown) could exert a force mω2 r
from which the angular speed ω could be ascertained. Each distinct force or range of forces
would result in a particular color being emitted from the LED system 1012. Thus the wheel
rim 1018 would appear in different colors depending on the angular speed.
Another specific embodiment comprising a force transducer appears in Fig. 78 where
an color inclinometer 1020 is shown. The inclinometer 1020 possesses a force transducer 1021
such as a linear variable differential transformer (LVDT) coupled to an A/D converter 1027 which is in turn coupled to an LED system 1022 of the present invention. A housing (not
shown) encloses the force transducer 1021 and the LED system 1022. The housing possesses
a fastener (not shown) to affix the housing and contents to an object whose inclination one
wants to determine such as an airplane. The fastener could, for example, consist of screws,
clamps, rivets, or glue to secure the inclinometer 1020 to an airplane console, for example.
A power module (not shown) can be coupled to the inclinometer. The inclinometer
1020 measures general angular orientation with respect to the earth's center of gravity. The
inclinometer's angle signal can be converted by the A/D converter 1027 and coupled to the
data inputs of the microcontroller in the power module. The microcontroller can then be
programmed to assign angular orientations to different color through the use of a lookup table
associating angles with LED color register values. The color inclinometer may be used for
safety, such as in airplane cockpits, or for novelty, such as to illuminate the sails on a sailboat
that sways in the water. In another embodiment, the light module 100 of the present invention can be used in a color magnometer as an indicator of magnetic field strength. Fig. 79 shows such a
magnometer 1036 having a magnetic field transducer 1031 coupled to an LED system 1032
via an A/D converter 1037. The magnetic field transducer can include any of a Hall-effect
probe, flip coil, or nuclear magnetic resonance magnometer.
The magnetic field transducer 1031 changes a magnetic field strength into an electrical
signal. This signal is, in turn, converted to binary information by the A/D converter 1037. The
information can then be sent as input to the microcontroller controlling the LED system 1032
to cause to shine lights of various colors that correspond to the magnetic field strength. This
embodiment could find wide use in the fields of geology and prospecting, as well as in the
operation of instruments that rely on magnetic fields to operate such as magnetic resonance
devices, magnetrons, and magnetically focused electron devices.
In another embodiment, the light module 100 of the present invention can be used for a
smoke alert system shown in Fig. 80. The smoke alert system 1040 comprises a smoke detector 1041, either of the ionization or optical (photoelectric) variety, electrically coupled to
an LED system 1042 of one embodiment of the present invention via an A/D converter (not
shown). The LED system 1042 need not be proximal to the detector 1041. In particular, the
smoke detector 1041 can be in one room where a fire might ignite, while the LED system
1042 might be in another room where it would be advantageous to be alerted, the bedroom or
bathroom for example.
As those of ordinary skill in the art would appreciate, the smoke detector 1041 can be
of either of two types: ionization or optical (photoelectric). If the latter is used, a detection
chamber in the smoke detector 1041 is employed whose shape normally prevents a light
sensitive element (e.g., a photocell) from "seeing" a light source (e.g., an LED). When smoke from a fire enters the chamber, it scatters light so that the light sensitive element can now detect the light. In a smoke detector 1041 employing ionization technology, radioactive
materials ionize air molecules between a pair of electrodes in a detection chamber. The
resultant charged air molecules permit a current to be conducted between the electrodes. The
presence of smoke in the chamber, however, diminishes the amount of charged air particles
and thus diminishes the current. In both types of smoke detectors, therefore, the strength of a
current is indicative of the concentration of smoke particles in the detection chamber. The
strength of this current can be converted by the A/D converter into binary information that can
be sent to the microprocessor controlling the LED system 1042. By using a look-up table, this
binary information can dictate the range of frequencies, corresponding to various smoke
concentrations, that is emitted from the LED system 1042. For example, a green or red light can be emitted if the concentration of smoke particles is below or above a certain threshold.
This invention could alert a person to a potential fire even if that person is incapable of hearing
the smoke detector's alarm. (The person may be deaf, listening to music, or in the shower, for example.) Also, conventional detectors convey only two pieces of information: the alarm is
either off, or, if sufficient smoke is in the detection chamber, on. The smoke alert system of the
present invention would also convey information about the amount of smoke present by
emitting characteristic colors.
Smoke is but one type of particle whose concentration can be indicated by the light
module 100 of the present invention. With the use of other particle detectors such as an
ionization chamber, Geiger counter, scintillator, solid-state detector, surface-barrier detector,
Cerenkov detector, or drift chamber, concentrations of other types of particles such as alpha
particles, electrons, or energetic photons represented by x-rays or gamma rays, can be
manifested by different colored LED lights. In another specific embodiment of the present invention, the light module 100 of the present invention can be used to build an electronic pH color meter for indicating the acidity of
solutions by displaying colored lights Fig 81 depicts a color pH meter 1050 comprising a pH
meter 1051 electrically coupled to an LED system 1052 via an A/D converter (not shown)
The electronic pH meter can be of a variety known to those of ordinary skill in the art
A possible example of an electronic pH meter that can be used is Corning pH Bench Meter
Model 430, which provides digital measurements and automatic temperature compensation
The meter produces an analog recorder output, which can be converted to a digital signal by
the A/D converter The signal can then be sent to a microcontroller controlling the LED
system 1052 which can emit colors corresponding to various pH levels
Besides the aforementioned pH meter, meters having ion-specific electrodes that
produce an analog signal corresponding to the concentration of a particular species in solution can also be used These meters measure voltages developed between a reference electrode,
typically silver-coated with silver chloride immersed in a concentrated solution of potassium
chloride, and an indicator electrode The indicator electrode is separated from an analyte by a
membrane through which the analyte ions can diffuse It is the nature of the membrane that
characterizes the type of ion-specific electrode Electrode types include glass, liquid-ion
exchanger, solid state, neutral earner, coated wire, field effect transistor, gas sensing, or a
biomembrane The reference electrode can communicate with the solution whose
concentration one is trying to determine via a porous plug or gel As described above, an
embodiment of an LED system of the present invention can be electrically coupled to such
meters to associate a particular ion concentration with the emission of light of vaπous colors
In another specific embodiment, the light module 100 of the present invention could be
used to produce a secuπty system to indicate the presence of an object Fig 82 shows such a system comprising an identification badge 1060, an LED system 1061 of the present invention,
a transmitter and receiver 1062 together with an electromagnetic radiation detector 1066
coupled to an A/D converter (not shown), and a security clearance network 1063 having a
receiver and transmitter 1064 of electromagnetic signals to the badge 1060.
The security clearance network 1063 responsive to the transmitter and receiver 1062
may identify the individual as having the appropriate security clearance for the room at a given
time. The badge 1060 itself may include the transmitter and receiver 1062, the electromagnetic
radiation detector 1066, coupled to the A/D converter, and the LED system 1061 responsive
to the security clearance network 1063, so that the badge 1060 changes color depending on
whether the individual has clearance to be in proximity to a particular receiver or not. The ID badge 1060 with the LED system 1061 on it may change color in response to a control
network depending on whether the person wearing it is "authorized" to be in a certain area, so
that others will know if that person is supposed to be there. This could also tell others if the
person must be "escorted" around the area or can roam freely. The advantages include time of
day based control, zone based control and the concept of moving control zones or rapid zone modification. For example, maintenance staff could be allowed in an area only when another
object is not present. For example, in a military aircraft hangar, cleaning might be allowed
only when the plane is not there. As another example, security zones in a factory may be used
for the purpose of keeping people safe, but when the factory is shut down, much larger areas
may be accessible.
In another embodiment, the light module 100 of the present invention can be used to
change the lighting conditions of a room. Fig. 83 depicts an electromagnetic radiation detector
1071 such as a photodiode, phototransistor, photomultiplier, channel-plate intensifier, charge- coupled devices, or intensified silicon intensifier target (ISIT) coupled to an A/D converter
(not shown), which in turn is electrically coupled to an LED system 1072.
The light module 100 may be programmed to increase room light as the external light
entering the room from the sun diminishes at the end of the day and to compensate for
changes in color temperature as well, through a feedback mechanism. In particular, a user
may measure the color temperature of particular lighting conditions with the electromagnetic
radiation detector 1071, identify the signal from the electromagnetic radiation detector 1071
under desired conditions, connect the microprocessor of the present invention to the
electromagnetic radiation detector 1071 and strobe the LED system 1072 of the present
invention through various lighting conditions until the signal from the electromagnetic
radiation detector 1071 indicates that the desired conditions have been obtained. By
periodically strobing the LED system 1072 and checking the signal from the electromagnetic radiation detector 1071, the light module 100 may be programmed to maintain precise lighting
conditions in a room.
In another embodiment, room or telephone lights could help identify the source or
intent of a telephone call. Fig. 84 shows a color telephone indicator 1080 comprising an LED
system 1082 of the present invention, an output port 1083 that can be either serial or parallel
and a connection wire 1084 connecting the system to a caller ID box 1085.
By emitting a characteristic color, it would be possible to determine whence a
telephone call is being placed. Thus, one could program the light module 100 to cause the
LED system 1082 to emit a red light, for example, if the call is being placed from a certain
telephone. Alternatively, a caller's wish to designate a call as being urgent could be conveyed
to a receiver by a particular color display. Thus, one could program the light module 100 to
cause the LED system 1082 to emit a red light, for example, if a caller has designated the call to be an emergency. Still another telephone application involves displaying a range of colors to
indicate to the receiver the length of time that a caller has been on hold. For example, the LED
system 1082 could emit a green, amber, or red light depending on whether the caller has been
on hold for less than one minute, between one and two minutes, and more than two minutes,
respectively. This last feature would be especially useful if the telephone has more than one
line, and it is important to keep track of various people who have been put on hold.
The foregoing disclosure has dealt with physical conditions that could be indicated by
using the LED system of the present invention. Also capable of being indicated in this manner
are other such conditions which include acceleration, acoustic, altitude, chemical, density,
displacement, distance, capacitance, charge, conduction, current, field strength, frequency,
impedance, inductance, power, resistance, voltage, heat, flow, friction, humidity, level, light, spectrum, mass, position, pressure, torque, linear velocity, viscosity, wind direction, and wind
speed.
In an embodiment of the invention, the signal-generating device is a remote control of
a conventional type used to control electronic devices through radio frequency or infrared
signals. The remote control includes a transmitter, control switches or buttons, and a
microprocessor and circuit responsive to the controls that causes the transmitter to transmit a
predetermined signal. In this embodiment of the invention, the microprocessor or
microprocessors that control the LEDs is connected to a receiver via a circuit and is capable of
processing and executing instructions from the remote control according to the transmitted
signal. The remote control may include additional features, such as illuminated buttons or
controls that are formed of LEDs and that change color or intensity in correspondence to the
change in the signal sent from the remote control. Thus a lever that is depressed to cause the
color of a controlled room light to strobe from red to violet may itself strobe in correspondence to the room light. This effect permits the user to control lights in conditions
where the actual LEDs may not be visible, or where interference from other sources makes the
true color of the controlled LED difficult to see.
In other embodiments of the invention, the input device for the signals that control the
microprocessor may be a light switch for control and mood setting. In particular, the physical
mechanism of the light switch, such as a dial, slide bar, lever or toggle, may include one or
more LEDs that are responsive to the external signal generated by the switch, so that using the
switch to change a microprocessor controlled array of LEDs, such as room lights, causes the
switch itself to change colors in a way that matches the changes in the room. The signal could
be used to control a multi-color light, monitor, television, or the like. Any control switch, dial,
knob or button that changes color in association with the output light that is controlled by the
same is within the scope of the present invention.
In another embodiment of the present invention, the input control device may
constitute a badge, card or other object associated with an individual that is capable of
transmitting a radio frequency, infrared, or other signal to a receiver that controls the
microprocessor that controls the arrayed LEDs of the present invention. The badge thus
constitutes an interface to the color settings in a room. The badge or card may be
programmed to transmit signals that reflect the personal lighting preferences of the individual
to the microprocessor, so that room lights or other illumination may be changed, in color or
intensity, when the person is in proximity to the receiver for the lights. The desired lighting
environment conditions are automatically reproduced via the lighting network in the room.
The badge could also include other data associated with the individual, such as music
preferences, temperature preferences, security preferences and the like, so that the badge
would transmit the data to receivers associated with networked electronic components that are responsive to the signals. Thus, by walking into a room, the individual could cause the lights,
music and temperature to be changed automatically by microprocessors controlling arrayed
LEDs or other lights, a compact disc player or similar music source, and a thermostat.
In another embodiment of the present invention, the arrayed LEDs may be placed in
the floor, ceiling or walls of an elevator, and the LEDs may be made responsive to electrical
signals indicating the floor. Thus, the color of the light in the elevator (or of a floor, ceiling or
wall lit by the light) may be varied according to the floor of the elevator.
In another embodiment of the present invention, depicted in Fig. 85, the signal-
generating device 504 may be a generator of a television, stereo, or other conventional
electronic entertainment signal. That is, the lighting control signal can be embedded in any
music, compact disc, television, videotape, video game, computer web site, cybercast or other
broadcast, cable, broadband or other communications signal. Thus, for example, the signal
for the microprocessor may be embedded into a television signal, so that when the television signal is processed by the receiver, a microprocessor processes certain portions of the
bandwidth of the television signal for signals relating to the room lights. In this embodiment,
the color and intensity of room lights, as well as other lighting effects, may be directly
controlled through a television signal. Thus, a television signal may instruct the room lights to
dim at certain points during the presentation, to strobe to different colors at other points, and
to flash at other points. The signals are capable of controlling each LED, so that a wide
variety of effects, such as those more particularly described herein, may be obtained. Among
other things, selected color washes may enhance visual effects during certain television or
movie scenes. For example, the explosion scene in a movie or on a computer game, could
cause lights in the room to flash a sequence or change to a specified color. A sunset in a movie
scene could be imitated by a sunset generated by the room lights. Alternatively, a music CD, DVD disk, audio tape, or VHS tape could contain room color, intensity or lighting positional
data. The present invention may be embodied not only in television signals, but in any other
signal-based source, such as music, film, a website, or the like, so that the lighting
environment, or specific lights, whether in the home, at work, or in a theater, can be matched
to the entertainment source.
Referring to Fig. 85, a signal generator 504 may be any device capable of generating
an entertainment signal, such as a television broadcast camera. Referring to Fig. 86, lighting
control data may be added to the signal generated by the signal generator through use of a
data encoder or multiplexor 508. Methods and systems for adding data to television signals
and other entertainment signals are known to those or ordinary skill in the art; for example,
standards exist for insertion of closed-captioning data into the vertical blanking interval of a
television broadcast signal, in order to have captioned text for the hearing-impaired appear on a portion of a television screen. Similar techniques can be used to insert lighting control data
into the same or similar portions of the television signal. In an embodiment of the invention, a
multiplexor may detect a horizontal sync pulse that identifies the beginning of the television
line, count a pre-determined amount of time after the pulse, and replace or supplement the
television signal data for a pre-determined amount of time after the pulse. Thus, a combined
signal of control data superimposed on the television signal may be produced. Similar
techniques may be used for other types of signals.
Once the signal is encoded, the signal may be transmitted by a data connection 512,
which may be a transmitter, circuit, telephone line, cable, videotape, compact disk, DVD,
network or other data connection of any type, to the location of the user's entertainment
device 514. A decoder 518 may be designed to separate the lighting control data from the
entertainment signal. The decoder 518 may be a decoder box similar to that used to decode closed-captioning or other combined signals. Such a decoder may, for example, detect the horizontal sync pulse, count time after the horizontal sync pulse and switch an output channel
between a channel for the entertainment device 514 and a different channel dedicated to
lighting control data, depending on the time after the horizontal sync pulse. Other techniques
for reading or decoding data from a combined signal, such as optical reading of black and
white pixels superimposed onto the television screen, are possible. Any system adding and
extracting lighting control data to and from an entertainment signal may be used. The
entertainment signal may then be relayed to the entertainment device 514, so that the signal
may be played in a conventional manner. The lighting control data, once separated from the
entertainment signal by the decoder 518, may be relayed to a lighting module or modules 100 for controlled illumination. The signal may be relayed to the light modules 100 by a data
connection 522 by any conventional data connection, such as by infrared, radio, or other
transmission, or by a circuit, network or data track.
Systems and methods provided herein include an system for combining illumination
control with another signal. One such embodiment is an entertainment system, which is
disclosed herein. It should be understood that other signals, such as those used for
informational, educational, business or other purposes could be combined with illumination
control signals in the manner described herein, and are within the scope of the disclosure,
notwithstanding the fact that the depicted embodiment is an entertainment system.
The entertainment system may include an illumination source 501, which may be part
of a group of such illumination sources 501. The illumination source 501, in this embodiment
of the invention, may be a light module 100 such as that disclosed above. Referring to Fig. 85,
the illumination source 501 may be disclosed about a space 503 in which an entertainment
system 561 is located. The illumination system may include the illumination sources 501, as well as an entertainment device 514. The illumination source 501 may include a receiver 505 for receiving a control signal to control the illumination source 501. The control signal can be
any type of control signal capable of controlling a device, such as a radio frequency signal, an
electrical signal, an infrared signal, an acoustic signal, an optical signal, or any other energy
signal.
The entertainment system 561 may include a decoder 518 that is capable of decoding
an incoming signal and transmitting the signal by a transmitter 522 to the illumination sources
501. The illumination system may further include a signal generator 504, which is depicted in
schematic form in Fig. 86 and Fig. 85. The signal generator 504 may generate any form of
entertainment signal, whether it be a video signal, an audio signal, a data packet, or other
signal. In an embodiment, as depicted in Fig. 85, a signal generator 504 generates a television signal that is transmitted to a satellite 507. Referring to Fig. 86, the signal generator 504 may
be associated with an encoder 508 which may include a multiplexor and which may combine a
signal from a signal generator 504 with control data from a control data generator 509. The
encoded signal 508 may then be transmitted by a transmitter 512 to the decoder 518. Once
decoded by the decoder 518, the signal may be split back into the entertainment signal
component and the illumination control data component. The entertainment signal may be
sent to the entertainment device 514 by a circuit or other conventional means. The control
data may be sent by a transmitter, circuit, network or other conventional connection 522 to the
illumination sources, which in the embodiment depicted in 86 are light modules 100 such as
disclosed above. As a result, illumination control may be associated with an entertainment
signal, so that the illumination produced by the illumination sources 501 can be matched to the
entertainment signal played on the entertainment device 514. Thus, for example, the room lights may be synchronized and controlled to create different conditions simultaneously with events that occur in programs that are being displayed on a television.
It should be recognized that any type of entertainment signal could be combined or
multiplexed with the control signal to permit control of the illumination sources 501 with the
entertainment device 514. For example, the entertainment device could be a television, a
computer, a compact disc player, a stereo, a radio, a video cassette player, a DVD player, a
CD-ROM drive, a tape player, or other device. It should be understood that the entertainment
device 514 could be a device for display for one or more of the above signals for purposes
other than entertainment. Thus, educational, informational, or other purposes and devices should be understood to be within the scope disclosed herein, although the embodiment
depicted is an entertainment device 514. It should be understood that the particular system for
combining the data, transmitting the data, and decoding the data for use by the device 514 and
the illumination sources 501 will depend on the particular application. Thus, the transmitter used in the embodiment depicted in Figs. 85 and 86 could be replaced with a circuit, a
network, or other method or system for connecting or transmitting a decoded signal. Similarly
the connection between the decoder 518 and the illumination sources 501 could be a
transmitter, circuit, network, or other connection method of delivering data to the illumination
sources 501.
The illumination control driver 509 that generates control data can be any data
generator capable of generating data for controlling the illumination sources 501. In an
embodiment of the invention, the control driver is similar to that disclosed in connection with
Fig. 6 hereof, and the illumination sources a light module 100. In this case, the data would be
sent according to the DMX-512 protocol. In an embodiment of the invention depicted in Fig 87, an encoder 508 is depicted in
schematic form in an embodiment where the signal is a television signal In this embodiment, a
video signal 51 1 enters the device at 513 from the signal generator 504 Control data 515 may
enter the encoder 508 at 517 from the illumination control driver 509 Other data or signals
may enter at 519 and 521 These other signals may be used to control the encoder 508, to
change the operation mode of the controller 508, or for other purposes The other signal 521
could also be some other form of piggyback signal that is related to the video signal 51 1 For
example, the other signal 521 could be closed-caption or teletext data that would be
multiplexed with the video signal The encoder 508 may include a sync detector 523 The
sync detector 523 may detect the horizontal sync pulse in the video signal 51 1 The sync detector may then send a signal 525 to a timing and control circuit 527
The timing and control circuit 527 may count a predetermined amount of time after the horizontal sync pulse detected by the sync detector 523 and control a series of gates or
switches 529, 531, 533 and 535 In particular, the timing and control circuit 527 may be used to open one of the gates 529, 531, 533 and 535 while keeping the other gates closed Thus,
the signal at the node 537 of Fig 87 represents the particular selected signal among the signals
511, 515, 519 and 521 that has an open gate among the gates 529, 531, 533 and 535 By
opening and closing different gates at different times, the timing and control circuit 527 can
generate a combined signal at 537 that captures different data at different points of the output
signal
In an embodiment the invention may include an analog to digital converter 539, an
amplifier 541, or other component or components to convert the signal to appropriate format
or to provide an adequate signal strength for use The end result is an output combined signal
543 that reflects multiple types of data In an embodiment, the combined signal combines a video signal 51 1 with illumination control data 515 that is capable of controlling the
illumination sources 501 depicted in Fig. 85.
Referring to Fig. 88, a depiction of the operation of the timing and control circuit 527
is provided. For each of the signals 51 1, 519, 515 and 521 the gate for the signal may be kept
on or off (i.e., open or closed) at a predetermined time after detection of the sync pulse by the
sync detector 523. The timing and control circuit may thus allocate the time periods after
detection of the sync pulse to be different signals, with only one of the gates 529, 531, 533 and
535 open at any particular time. Thus, the gate for the video signal 51 1 is open for the time
immediately after detection of the sync pulse and for a time after the gates have been opened
and closed. The gate for the data signal 519, the control data 515 and the other signal 521 can
be opened in sequence, with no single gate open at the same time as any other gate. This
approach, as reflected by the schematics of Fig. 87 and Fig. 88, establishes a combined signal
without interference between the constituent signals 511, 519, 515 and 521.
Referring to Fig. 89, an embodiment of a decoder 518 is provided. In this embodiment, the decoder 518 is a decoder box for a video signal. The incoming signal at 545
may be the combined signal produced by the encoder 508 of Fig. 87. A detector 547 may
detect the horizontal or other sync pulse in the combined signal 545 and send a signal 549 to a
control circuit 551 to establish the timing of the control circuit 551. The combined signal 545
may be also be sent to the timing and control circuit 551, which may process the incoming
combined signal 545 according to the time of arrival, or using other information. In one
embodiment, the decoder may separate the incoming signal according to the time of arrival as
determined by the sync detector 547. Therefore, by coding the timing of the opening of the
gates as depicted in Fig. 88, the timing and control circuit 551 can separate video, control
data, and other data according to the time of arrival. Thus, the timing and control circuit 551 can send a video signal 553 to the entertainment device 514. The timing and control circuit 551 can similarly send control data 555 to the illumination source 501, which may be a light
module 100 such as that depicted above. The other data can be sent to another device 557.
Other elements can be included between the timing and control circuit 551 and the
respective device; for example, a digital to analog converter 559 could be disposed between
the timing and control circuit 551 and the entertainment device 514 to permit use of an analog
signal with the entertainment device 514. It should be understood that the timing and control
approach depicted in the schematic Fig. 89 is only one of many approaches of decoding a
combined signal. For example, the signal could be a data packet, in which case the packet
could include specific information regarding the type of signal that it is, including information
that specifies which illumination source 501 it is intended to control. In this case the timing and control 551 could include a shift register for accepting and outputting data packets to the
appropriate devices.
The embodiments depicted in Figs. 85-89 are merely illustrative, and many
embodiments of circuits or software for producing such a system would be readily apparent to
one of ordinary skill in the art. For example, many systems and methods for inserting data into signals are known. For example, systems are provided for including closed-caption data,
vertical interval time code data, non-real time video data, sample video data, North American
Basic Teletex specification data, World System Teletex data, European broadcast union data
and Nielsen automated, measurement and lineup data, and entry video signals. One such
system is disclosed in U.S. Patent No. 5,844,615 to Nuber et al., the disclosure of which is
incorporated by reference herein. Systems and methods for nesting signals within a television
signal are also known. One such system is disclosed in U.S. patent no. 5,808,689 to Small,
the entire disclosure of which is incorporated by reference herein. Other applications include surround sound, in which certain sound data is combined with a signal, which may be a motion
picture, music, or video signal. Such surround sound systems are known to those skilled in
the art. One such system is disclosed in U.S. patent no. 5,708,718 to Ambourn et al., the
entire disclosure of which is incorporated by reference herein. Any system for superimposing
data onto a signal or combining data with a signal for controlling a device wherein the system
is capable of also carrying illumination control information produced by an illumination control
driver for controlling an illumination source should be understood to be within the scope of
the invention.
In the television embodiment, different portions of the television signal are used for
different purposes. One portion of the signal is used for the visible image that appears on the
screen. Another portion is used for audio signals. Another is the overscan area. Another
portion is the vertical blanking interval. Another portion is the horizontal blanking interval. Any portion of the signal can be used to carry data. In an embodiment, the data is located in
one of the portions, such as the horizontal blanking interval or the vertical blanking interval,
that does not interfere with the display on the screen. However, it is known that a typical
television does not display all of the display portion of the television signal. Therefore, the
initial part of the television display signal could also be replaced with the illumination control
data without substantially interfering with the appearance of the picture to the user of the
entertainment device 514.
In embodiments, a user may measure the color temperature of particular lighting
conditions with a light sensor, identify the signal from the light sensor under desired
conditions, connect the processor of the present invention to the light sensor and strobe the
arrayed LEDs of the present invention through various lighting conditions until the signal from
the light sensor indicates that the desired conditions have been obtained. By periodically strobing the LEDs and checking the signal from the light sensor, the arrayed LEDs of the present invention may thus be programmed to maintain precise lighting conditions in a room
This light compensation feature may be useful in a number of technological fields For
example, a photographer could measure ideal conditions, such as near sunset when warm
colors predominate, with a light sensor and reestablish those exact conditions as desired with
the arrayed LEDs of the present invention Similarly, a surgeon in an operating theater could
establish ideal lighting conditions for a particular type of surgery and reestablish or maintain
those lighting conditions in a controlled manner Moreover, due to the flexible digital control
of the arrayed LEDs of the present invention, any number of desired lighting conditions may
be programmed for maintenance or reestablishment Thus, a photographer may select a range
of options, depending on the desired effect, and the surgeon may select different lighting conditions depending on the surgical conditions For example, different objects appear more
or less vividly under different colors of light If the surgeon is seeking high contrast, then
lighting conditions can be preprogrammed to create the greatest contrast among the different elements that must be seen in the surgery Alternatively, the surgeon, photographer, or other
user may strobe the lighting conditions through a wide range until the conditions appear
optimal
The ability to vary lighting conditions, continuously or discretely, at short time
intervals and over a wide range of colors, permits a number of technological advances in fields
that depend on controlled illumination Certain embodiments of the invention in the area of
controlled illumination are set forth as follows The present disclosure further provides systems and methods for precision illumination.
Precision illumination is understood to include those systems and methods that direct light at
specified targets to achieve predetermined effects. The present invention provides a light
source that does not generate excessive heat in the area being illuminated. The invention
further provides facile alteration of light color being used for illumination. The invention
further delivers illumination to a target material through a durable and manipulable apparatus.
The present invention provides a system for illuminating a material, including
an LED system, a processor and a positioning system. The LED system is adapted for
generating a range of frequencies within a spectrum, the processor is adapted for controlling
the amount of electrical current supplied to the LED system, so that a particular amount of
current supplied thereto generates a corresponding frequency within a spectrum, and the positioning system is capable of positioning the LED system in a spatial relationship with the
material whereby the LED system illuminates the material. In one embodiment, the processor
can be responsive to a signal relating to a feature of the material. In an embodiment, the
positioning system can be capable of being directed by a part of an operator's body. In
another embodiment, the positioning system can include a remote control system. In another
embodiment, the illumination system described herein can include a robotic vision system.
The present invention provides a method for illuminating a material including the steps
of providing an LED system, providing a processor, positioning the LED system in a spatial
relationship with the material whereby the LED system illuminates the material, and producing
light from the LED system. As described above, the LED system is adapted for generating a
range of frequencies within a spectrum, and the processor is adapted for controlling the
amount of electrical current supplied to the LED system, so that a particular amount of current
supplied thereto generates a corresponding color within the spectrum. In one practice, the method can include providing an image capture system, wherein the image capture system is
adapted for recording an image of the material. A practice of the method can include the steps
of determining the range of frequencies within the spectrum for illuminating the material, and
controlling the LED system to generate the corresponding color within the spectrum. The
material being illuminated by these methods can include a biological entity. The biological
entity can include a living organism. A method of the disclosed invention can include the steps
of selecting an illumination condition to be produced in the material, illuminating the material
with a range of frequencies produced by the LED system, and selecting from the range of
frequencies produced by the LED system a set of colors, whereby the set of colors produces in
the material said illumination condition. A practice of the methods of this invention can
include a further step of illuminating the material with the selected set of colors.
The present invention provides a method for evaluating a material, including the steps of selecting an area of the material for evaluation, illuminating the area of the material with an
LED system, determining at least one characteristic of a light reflected from the area, wherein
the characteristic is selected from the group including color and intensity, and comparing the
characteristic of the light reflected from the area with a set of known light parameters,
whereby the set of known light parameters relates to a feature of said material. According to
one practice of the method, the set of known light parameters relates to an abnormal feature of
the material. In one embodiment, the material being evaluated comprises a biological entity.
The present invention provides a system for illuminating a body part, including a power
source, an LED system connected to the power source, said LED system being adapted for
illuminating the body organ, a medical instrument adapted for positioning the LED system in
proximity to the body part to illuminate the body part, and a microprocessor for controlling
the LED system. In one embodiment, the microprocessor is responsive to a signal relating to a feature of the body part. The feature of the body part can be a structural condition. In one
embodiment, the body part is illuminated in vivo. In one embodiment, the body part includes a
lumen. In an embodiment, the medical instrument is adapted for insertion within a body
cavity.
The present invention provides a method for diagnosing a condition of a body part,
including the steps of selecting an area of the body part for evaluation, illuminating the area of
the body part with an LED system, determining at least one characteristic of a light reflected
from the area, wherein the characteristic is selected from the group including color and
intensity, and comparing the characteristic of the light reflected from the area with a set of
known light parameters, wherein the set of known light parameters relates to the condition of
the body part. In one practice of the method, the set of known light parameters relates to a
pathological condition of the body part. The method can include the additional step of
administering an agent to a patient, wherein the agent is delivered to the body part, and whereby the agent alters the characteristic of the light reflected from the area of the body part.
The present invention provides a method for effecting a change in a material, including
the steps of providing an LED system for generating a range of frequencies within a
spectrum, selecting from the range of colors a set of colors, whereby the set of colors
produces in the material the change, illuminating the material with the LED system for a
period of time predetermined to be effective in producing the change. In one embodiment, the
material being illuminated can comprise a biological entity. The biological entity can comprise
a living organism. The living organism can be a vertebrate. In one practice, the method can
include the step of illuminating the an environment surrounding the living organism.
The present invention provides a method for treating a condition of a patient, including
the steps of providing an LED system comprising a plurality of color-emitting semiconductor dies for generating a range of frequencies within a spectrum, selecting from the range of colors
a set of colors, whereby the set of colors produces in the patient a therapeutic effect, and
illuminating an area of the patient with the set of colors for a period of time predetermined to
be effective in producing the therapeutic effect. In one embodiment, the area of the patient
comprises an external surface of the patient. In one embodiment, the area of the patient
comprises a body part. According to one practice of these methods, an agent can be
administered to a patient, wherein the agent is delivered to the area of the patient, and
whereby the agent alters the therapeutic effect achieved by illuminating the area of the patient
with the set of colors.
The present invention provides an illumination system, including a power terminal, an
LED system, a current sink coupled to the LED system, the current sink comprising an input
responsive to an activation signal that enables flow of current through the current sink, an addressable controller having an alterable address, the controller coupled to the input and
having a timer for generating the activation signal for a predefined portion of a timing cycle,
the addressable controller further comprising a data receiver corresponding to the alterable
address and indicative of the predefined portion of the timing cycle, and a positioning system
capable of positioning the LED system in a spatial relationship with a material whereby the
LED system illuminates the material.
Other practices and embodiments of the invention will, in part, be set forth below and
will, in part, be obvious to one of ordinary skill in these arts given the following descriptions.
In the embodiments depicted below, LED systems are used to generate a range of
colors within a spectrum. "LED system," as the term is used herein, refers to an array of
color-emitting semiconductor dies. Color emitting semiconductor dies are also termed light
emitting diodes or LEDs. The array of color-emitting semiconductor dies can include a plurality of color-emitting semiconductor dies grouped together in one structural unit.
Alternatively, the array of color-emitting semiconductor dies can comprise a plurality of
structural units, each comprising at least one color-emitting semiconductor die. An LED
system can further comprise a plurality of structural units, each unit comprising a plurality of
color-emitting semiconductor dies. It is understood that as long as at least two primary color
LEDs are used, any illumination or display color may be generated simply by preselecting the
light intensity that each color LED emits. Further, as described in part in the foregoing
specification, each color LED can emit light at any of a large number of different intensities,
depending on the duty cycle of PWM square wave, with a full intensity pulse generated by
passing maximum current through the LED. The term brightness, as used herein, is
understood to refer to the intensity of a light. As an example, described in part above, the maximum intensity of an LED or of the LED system can be conveniently programmed simply
by adjusting the ceiling for the maximum allowable current using programming resistances for
the processors residing on the light module. In one embodiment of the present invention, a multicolor illuminating system is
provided for illuminating a material. The terms "illumination" and "illuminate" as used herein can refer to direct illumination, indirect illumination or transillumination. Illumination is
understood to comprise the full spectrum radiation frequencies, including, visible, ultraviolet,
and infrared, as well as others. Illumination can refer to energy that comprises any range of
spectral frequencies. Illumination can be viewed or measured directly, whereby the reflected
light regarded by the viewer or sensor is reflected at an angle relative to the surface
substantially equivalent to the angle of the incident light. Illumination can be viewed or
measured indirectly, whereby the reflected light regarded by the viewer or sensor is reflected
at an angle relative to the surface that is different than the angle of the incident light. Direct or indirect illumination can be directed at the surface of a material. A surface can be a naturally occurring surface such as a body part or a geological formation. Alternatively, the surface can
be a face of an apparatus. A surface can have a three-dimensional topography. A surface can
have a plurality of objects affixed to it.
The term "material" as used herein encompasses the full range of materials that can be
targets for illumination. The term "transillumination" refers to an illumination method
whereby light is directed at least in part through a material, wherein the characteristics of the
light are regarded by a viewer or a sensor after the light has passed through the material. As
an example of transillumination, illumination from a gastroscope can be directed through the
wall of the stomach and through the overlying soft tissues so that a site can be identified for
placement of a percutaneous endoscopic gastrostomy tube. As another example of
transillumination, a light can be directed at a surface of a tissue mass to determine whether it is
cystic or solid. A cystic mass is said to transilluminate, this term referring to the fact that light passes through the mass to be perceptible by an observer at a site remote from the site of the
incident light.
Fig. 90A depicts an embodiment of an illumination system 2020. The embodiment
illustrated in Fig 90A shows a positioning system 2010, a control module 2012, an LED
assembly 2014 and a target material 2018. In the embodiment illustrated in Fig. 90A, the
target material 2018 is represented as a surface of an apparatus. It will be apparent to those of
ordinary skill in the relevant arts that the target material 2018 can be any material, and is not
limited to the illustrated embodiment. In Fig 90A, an embodiment of the illumination system
2020 is shown directing incident light 2022 at material 2018. Fig. 90 A further illustrates a
LED assembly 2014, comprising a sensor system 2024 and an LED system 2028. In one *
embodiment, a plurality or an array of LEDs comprises the LED system 2028, each LED being controlled by the control module 2012. An LED system 2028 is understood to comprise a plurality of color-emitting semiconductor dies for generating a range of colors within a
spectrum. The LED system 2028 can comprise the light module 100 or the smart light bulb
701 disclosed above. In the embodiment illustrated in Fig. 90 A, the sensor system 2024 is
capable of providing a signal related to the characteristics of the light reflected to the sensor
system 2024 from the material 2018. In an alternate embodiment, a sensor system 2024 can
be responsive to other features of the material 2018. A sensor system 2024 can be affixed to
the LED system housing, or a sensor system 2024 can be positioned in juxtaposition to the
LED system 2028. Other placements of the sensor system 2024 relative to the LED system
2028 can be readily envisioned by those of ordinary skill in these arts. Alternately, an
embodiment can provide no sensor system.
Fig. 90A further depicts a positioning arm 2032, a control module 2012 and a LED
cable 2034 through which can pass the electrical signal to the LED system 2028, and the data
signal to the LED system 2028. Optionally, a data signal can pass to the sensor module (not
shown) from the sensor system 2024. The LED cable 2034 can carry these sensor signals.
The control module 2012 in the illustrated embodiment can contain the processor for the LED
system, the power source for the LED system, the sensor module for the sensor system and a
processor for relating the signals received by the sensor system 2024 to the processor, so that
signals received by the sensor module affect the output characteristics of the LED system
2028. The control module can further include a position controller (not shown). In the
illustrated embodiment the positioning system 2010 comprises the positioning arm 2032, the
position controller and a positioning cable 2038. This depiction of a positioning system is
merely illustrative. As the term is used herein, a positioning system is understood to include
any system capable of positioning the LED system in a spatial relationship with the material being illuminated whereby the LED system illuminates the material A positioning system,
therefore, can include an apparatus of any kind capable of positioning the LED system. A
positioning system can comprise a human operator who is capable of positioning the LED
system in a spatial relationship with the material being illuminated whereby the LED system
illuminates the material. A positioning system can further comprise the LED cable if the LED
cable is adapted for positioning the LED system in a spatial relationship with the material
being illuminated.
A plurality of positioning systems can be envisioned by practitioners in these arts that
will conform to the features of the particular material being illuminated. For example, a
positioning system adapted for microsurgery can be mounted on an operating microscope and
can be controlled by a control module suitable for receiving positioning input from the microsurgeons. As one option for a positioning system to be used in microsurgery or other
surgical procedures, a foot pedal system can provide positioning input, either using a foot-
operated button, pedal or slide. As an alternative option, a manual control can be adapted for
placement in the sterile field by convering the manual control with a sterile plastic bag or sheet
so the microsurgeon can manipulate the control manually without compromising sterile
technique.
As an example of a positioning system, a standard surgical light fixture can be
equipped with an LED system as disclosed herein. The standard surgical light fixture is
capable of positioning the LED system in a spatial relationship with the material being
illuminated whereby the LED system illuminates the material. This positioning system can be
adjusted manually in the standard fashion well-known to surgical practitioners. Alternatively,
the positioning system can be controlled in response to signals input from a separate control
module. The positioning system can change its position to illuminate materials designated by the operator, either in response to direct input into the control module or as a response to signals transmitted to a sensor apparatus. Other embodiments of positioning systems can be
envisioned by those skilled in these arts. The scope of the term "positioning system" is not to
be limited by the embodiment illustrated in this figure. A plurality of other positioning systems
can be envisioned consistent with the systems and methods described herein.
Fig 90 A illustrates an embodiment of a positioning system 2010 where the LED
assembly 2014 is located at the distal end of the positioning arm 2032. In this embodiment,
the position controller can transmit signals to the positioning arm 2032 to adjust its spatial
position. These signals can be carried through the positioning cable 2038. Alternatively, the
signals can be transmitted by infrared, by radio frequency, or by any other method known in
the art. Remote access to the control module 2012 can permit the illumination system 2020 to
be controlled from a great distance, for example in undersea or aerospace applications.
Remote access also permits control of the illumination system 2020 when the illumination system 2020 is operating in hostile or inhospitable environments. Remote access to the
control module is understood to comprise remote control. Techniques for remote control are
familiar to practitioners in these arts.
In the illustrated embodiment, the positioning arm 2032 has a plurality of articulations
2040 permitting its three-dimensional motion. In the illustrated embodiment, the articulations
2040 are arranged to provide the flexibility required by a particular technical application.
Positioning can be accomplished with other mechanisms besides those depicted in Fig 90A.
These mechanisms will be familiar to practitioners in the art. As depicted in Fig 90 A, the
proximal end of the positioning arm 2032 is anchored to a base 2026. The articulation
connecting the positioning arm 2032 to the base 2026 can be arranged to permit motion along an axis parallel to or perpendicular to the axes of motion permitted by the other articulations 2040
The positioning system depicted in Fig 90 A is merely one embodiment of the systems
described herein A plurality of other embodiments are available, as will be realized by
practitioners of ordinary skill in the relevant arts In one embodiment, the positioning system
2010 can be configured for large-scale applications, such as the evaluation of sheet metal or
structural steel Alternatively, the positioning system 2010 can be adapted for microscopic
adjustments in position. It is understood that the light provided by the illumination system can
be used for a plurality of precision applications Fine three-dimensional control of the
illumination pattern can direct the light to an exact three-dimensional position In an alternate
embodiment, signals from the sensor module can be used to control or to activate the position
controller, so that the positioning system 2010 can be directed to move the LED assembly
2014 in response to received sensor data. The illumination system comprising the LED system
2028 allows the selection of a colored light predetermined to facilitate visualization of the target material 2018. The strobing effect provided by an embodiment of the illumination
system can permit freeze-frame imaging of dynamic processes, or can enhance the resolution
of images acquired using conventional imaging modalities.
An embodiment of the illumination system can be used for taking photomicrographs.
In another embodiment of the present invention, the illumination system 2020 may be used to
improve the quality of robotic vision applications In many robotic vision applications, such as
location of semiconductor chips during the manufacturing process, reading of bar code
matrices, location of robotic devices during manufacturing, or the like, a robotic camera is
required to identify shapes or contrasts and to react accordingly. Different lighting conditions
can have a dramatic effect on such vision systems A method for improving the accuracy of such systems includes creating a color image via a sequence of multiple black and white images taken under multiple different strobed illuminating sequences. For example, the user
may strobe a red strobe to get the red frame, a green strobe to get the green frame, and a blue
strobe to get the blue frame. The strobing effect permits a higher resolution by the robotic
camera of the image required for robotic vision. Other embodiments can be envisioned by
those of ordinary skill in the art without departing from the scope of the present invention.
Fig. 90B shows in more detail a schematic diagram of the control module 2012. In the
illustrated embodiment, the control module 2012 provides a housing 2042 that contains a
power source 2044, a first microprocessor 2048 for the LED, a sensor module 2050 adapted
for receiving signals from the sensors affixed to the distal end of the position arm, and a
position controller 2052. The illustrated embodiment features a second microprocessor 2054
for relating data received by the sensor module 2050 to data for controlling the LED system.
The position controller 2052 is adapted for adjusting the three-dimensional position of the positioning arm. The position controller 2052 can include an input device 2058 for receiving
signals or data from an outside source. As an example, data can be input through a control panel operated by an operator. Data can be in the form of 3-D coordinates to which the
position system is directed to move, or in any other form that can be envisioned by
practitioners of these arts. Data can also be provided through computer programs that
perform calculations in order to identify the 3-D coordinates to which the position system is
directed to move. The input device 2058 can be configured to receive data received through a
computer-based 3-dimensional simulator or virtual reality apparatus. Further examples of
input devices 2058 can be envisioned by those of ordinary skill in the art without departing
from the scope of this invention. The control module 2030 depicted in Fig. 90B further shows
a sensor module 2050 adapted for receiving signals from the sensors affixed to the distal end of the position arm. The sensor module 2050 can be configured to receive any type of signal,
as described in part above. A sensor module 2050 can comprise a light meter for measuring
the intensity of the light reflected by the surface being illuminated. A sensor module 2050 can
comprise a colorimeter, a spectrophotometer or a spectroscope, although other sensor
modules and sensor systems can be employed without departing from the scope of the
invention. A spectrophotometer is understood to be an instrument for measuring the intensity
of light of a specific wavelength transmitted or reflected by a substance or a solution, giving a
quantitative measure of the amount of material in the substance absorbing the light. Data
received in the sensor module 2050 can be used to evaluate features of a material. In one
embodiment, sensor module 2050 can be configured to provide data output to an output
device 2060. The output data can include values that can be compared to a set of known
values using algorithms familiar to those skilled in these arts. The relationship between the
output data and the set of known values can be determined so as to yield meaningful information about the material being illuminated by the illumination system.
Fig. 91 depicts an embodiment of an illumination system 2056 capable of being
directed by a part of an operator's body. The embodiment shown in Fig. 91 depicts an
illumination system 2056 held in the operator's hand 2062. In the illustrated embodiment, the
LED system 2064 is positioned at the distal end of a handheld wand 2068 that can be disposed
in the operator's hand 2062 and directed towards a material 2070. The LED cable 2072
connects the LED system 2064 to a power source (not shown). The LED cable 2072 transmits
power signals and data signals to the LED system 2064. In an alternate embodiment, sensors
can be positioned at the distal end of the handheld wand 2068 to provide sensing data as
described above. The signals from the sensors can be transmitted through the LED cable 2072
in one embodiment. In yet another embodiment, the handheld wand 2068 can include an imaging system for video imaging. This imaging system can permit display of real-time images, for example on a video screen. Alternatively, this imaging system can permit capture
of still or motion images through appropriate software and hardware configurations.
Illuminating the material 2070 with a variety of colors can result in significantly different
images, as described in part above. Strobing the light provided by the illumination system
2056 can allow capture of still images and can allow improved improved resolution. The
handheld system can be used for any application where using an operator's hand 2062 is
advantageous in positioning the illumination system. In an embodiment, the system can be
entirely handheld, as illustrated in Fig 91. In an alternate embodiment, a wand bearing the
LED can be affixed to a framework that supports it, whereby the positioning of the wand is
facilitated by direct manipulation by the operator's hand. In yet another embodiment, the
illumination system can be borne on the operator's hand by a band or a glove, so that the position of the illumination system can be directed by the movements of the operator's hand.
In other embodiments, the illumination system can be affixed to or retained by other body
parts, to be directed thereby.
In another embodiment of the present invention, the LEDs are displayed in proximity
to the workpiece that requires illumination. Thus, an improved flashlight, light ring, wrist
band or glove may include an array of LEDs that permit the user to vary the lighting
conditions on the workpiece until the ideal conditions are recognized. This embodiment of the
invention may be of particular value in applications in which the user is required to work with
the user's hands in close proximity to a surface, such as in surgery, mechanical assembly or
repair, particularly where the user cannot fit a large light source or where the workpiece is
sensitive to heat that is produced by conventional lights. In one practice of a method for illuminating a material, a LED system, as described above, can be used. According to this practice, an LED system and a processor are provided.
The practice of this method can then involve positioning the LED system in a spatial
relationship with the material to be illuminated. The positioning can take place manually or
mechanically. The mechanical placement can be driven by input from an operator.
Alternately, mechanical placement can be driven by a data set or a set of algorithms provided
electronically. A first microprocessor can be provided for controlling the LED system. In an
embodiment, a second microprocessor can be provided for positioning the positioning system
in relation to the material to be illuminated. In yet another embodiment, a third microprocessor can be provided for processing data input from a sensor system or input from
a control panel. Each microprocessor can be related to each other microprocessor, so that
changes in one function can be related to changes in other functions.
In one practice, the method can further comprise providing an image capture system for recording an image of the material. An image capture system, as the term is used herein,
comprises techniques using film-based methods, techniques using digital methods and
techniques using any other methods for image capture. An image capture system further
comprises methods that record an image as a set of electronic signals. Such an image can
exist, for example, in a computer system. In the current arts, images can be captured on film,
on magnetic tape as video or in digital format. Images that are captured using analog
technologies can be converted to digital signals and captured in digital format. Images, once
captured, can be further manipulated using photomanipulative software, for example Adobe
Photoshop™. Photomanipulative software is well-known in the art to permit modification of
an image to enhance desirable visual features. An image once captured can be published using
a variety of media, including paper, CD-ROM, floppy disc, other disc storage systems, or published on the Internet. The term recording as used herein refers to any image capture,
whether permanent or temporary. An image capture system further includes those
technologies that record moving images, whether using film-based methods, videotape, digital
methods or any other methods for capturing a moving image. An image capture system
further includes those technologies that permit capture of a still image from moving images.
An image, as the term is used herein, can include more than one image. As one embodiment, a
photography system can be provided whereby the material being illuminated is photographed
using film-based methods. In this embodiment, the LED system can be strobed to permit stop-
action photography of a moving material.
In an alternative embodiment, a sensor system can be arranged to identify the
characteristics of light reflected by a material and the LED system can be controlled to
reproduce a set of desired light characteristics so that the material will be optimally illuminated
to achieve a desired photographic effect. This effect may be an aesthetic one, although industrial and medical effects can be achieved. For example, a set of characteristics for
ambient light in the operating room can be identified by surgical personnel and replicated
during surgery. Certain types of lighting conditions can be more suitable for certain
operations. As another example, photography can be carried out using the LED system to
provide certain characteristics for the photographic illumination. As is well-known in the art,
certain light tones and hues highlight certain colors for photography. Different light systems
used for photography can cause different tones and hues to be recorded by the photograph.
For example, incandescent light is known to produce more reddish skin tones, while
fluorescent light is known to produce a bluish skin tone. The LED system can be used to
provide consistent tones and hues in a photographic subject from one lighting environment to another. Other desired photographic effects can be envisioned by those skilled in the relevant arts.
As one practice of a method for illuminating a material, a predetermined range of
colors can be selected within the spectrum. The LED system can then be controlled to
generate these colors and to illuminate the material thereby. The material to be illuminated
can be an inanimate entity. In one embodiment, a chemical reaction or its component reagents
can be illuminated according to this method, whereby the illumination is understood to
influence the characteristics of the chemical reaction. In another embodiment, the method of
illumination can be directed to a biological entity. The term biological entity as used herein
includes any entity related to biology. The term biology refers to the science concerned with
the phenomena of life and living organism. Hence, a biological entity can comprise a cell, a tissue, an organ, a body part, a cellular element, a living organism, a biological product, a
chemical or an organic material produced by a biological entity or through biotechnology, or
any other entity related to biology. Further, though, the term biological entity can refer to a
substance that was once part of a living organism, including a substance extracted from a
living organism and including a substance that is no longer alive. Pathological specimens are
encompassed by the term biological entity. A living organism is called out as a particular
embodiment of a biological entity, but this usage is not intended to narrow the scope of the
term biological entity as it is used herein. In one practice of a method for illuminating a
biological entity, that biological entity can be a living organism. A living organism can include
cells, microorganisms, plants, animals or any other living organism.
As a practice of a method for illuminating a material, a predetermined desired
illumination condition can be selected, and a material can be illuminated with a range of colors
until the desired condition is attained. A range of colors can be selected according to this method, wherebv the selected colors are capable of producing the desired condition Optionally, an additional step of this practice comprises illuminating the material with the
selected colors, so as to bring about the desired effect This method can be applied to non¬
living or biological entities
It is understood that a method for illuminating a living organism can have specific
effects upon its structure, physiology or psychology As embodiments of a method for
illuminating a living organism, these technologies can be directed towards cells,
microorganisms, plants or animals These practices can comprise, without limitation,
microbiological applications, cloning applications, cell culture, agricultural applications, aquaculture, veterinary applications or human applications As an example, plant growth can
be accelerated by precisely controlling the spectrum of light they are grown in Fig 92A shows
a practice of this method, whereby a plurality of LED systems 2074 provide illumination to
fruitbeaπng plants 2078 being grown in a greenhouse environment The size and number of fruit 2080 on these plants 2078 are understood to compare advantageously to the results of
the method illustrated in Fig 92B, wherein the fruitbeaπng plants 2078 illuminated with natural
light 2082 are observed to bear smaller and fewer fruits 2080 As a further example, cellular
growth in culture can be improved by illuminating the cells or the media with light having
certain spectral qualities As another example, optimal breeding and animal health can be
achieved by illuminating the subjects with a range of colors within the spectrum As yet
another example, replicating for a marine species in an aquaπum the spectrum of light in its
waters of oπgin can significantly increase its hfespan in captivity For example, it is
understood that the spectrum in the Red Sea is distinctly different from the spectrum in the
waters of Cape Cod According to a practice of this method, the illumination conditions of the
Red Sea can be reproduced in an aquaπum containing Red Sea species, with salubπous effect As an additional example, an organism's circadian rhythms can be evoked by illuminating the
subject creature with light of varying spectral characteristics.
As a practice of a method for illumination, a material can be evaluated by selecting an
area of the material to be evaluated, illuminating that area with an LED system, determining
the characteristics of the light reflected from that area and comparing those characteristics of
color and/or intensity with a set of known light parameters that relate to a feature of the
material being evaluated. The feature being evaluated can be a normal feature or an abnormal
feature of the material. As an example, the integrity of a tooth can be evaluated by directing
light of a particular color at the tooth to identify those areas that are carious. Structural
conditions of materials can be evaluated by illuminating those materials and looking for
abnormalities in reflected light. A practice of this method can be applied to biological entities. In forensic pathology, for example, various kinds of fillings for teeth can be distinguished by
the way in which they reflect light of particular spectra This allows identifications to be made
based on dental records for forensic purposes. An embodiment of this method related to
biological entities is adapted for use in a variety of medical applications, as will be described in
more detail hereinafter.
In another embodiment of the present invention, as described in part above, a
multicolor illuminator is provided for surgical illumination. Different body organs are typically
low in relative color contrast. By changing color conditions in a controlled manner, the
surgeon or assistant can increase this relative contrast to maximize the visibility of important
surgical features, including internal organs and surgical instruments. Thus, if the surgeon is
trying to avoid nerve tissue in a surgery, a light that is designed to create the maximum
apparent contrast between nerve tissue color and other tissue will permit the greatest
precision. Surgical lights of the present invention can be of any conventional configuration, such as large theater lights, or can be attached to surgical instruments, such as an endoscope,
surgical gloves, clothing, or a scalpel
Fig 93 A depicts one embodiment of a system for illuminating a body part according to
the present invention This illustration shows a medical instrument for positioning the LED
system in proximity to a body part, here a conventional surgical retractor 2084 with the LED
system 2088 affixed to the anteπor aspect of its retracting face 2090 The illustrated surgical
retractor 2084 resembles a Richardson-type retractor, well-known in the art Other medical
instruments can be employed to bear the LED system 2088 without departing from the scope
of these systems and methods Medical instruments bearing LED systems can be used for
illuminating a body part
In the embodiment depicted in Fig 93 A, a conventional surgical retractor 2084 is shown elevating a segment of body tissue, here depicted as the edge of the liver 2104 The
illumination from the LED system 2088 is directed at a body part, here the gallbladder 21 10
and porta hepatis 21 12 As used herein, the term body part refers to any part of the body
The term is meant to include without limitation any body part, whether that body part is
described in anatomic, physiologic or topographic terms A body part can be of any size, whether macroscopic or microscopic The term body part can refer to a part of the body in
vivo or ex vivo The term ex vivo is understood to refer to any body part removed from body,
whether that body part is living or is non-living An ex vivo body part may compπse an organ
for transplantation or for replantation An ex vivo body part may compπse a pathological or a
forensic specimen An ex vivo body part can refer to a body part in vitro The term body part
shall be further understood to refer to the anatomic components of an organ As an example,
the appendix is understood to be an anatomic component of the organ known as the intestine In the illustrated embodiment, the porta hepatis 21 12 is an anatomic region that is a body part. The porta hepatis 2112 is understood to bear a plurality of other body parts,
including the portal vein 21 14, the hepatic artery 21 18, the hepatic nerve plexus, the hepatic
ducts and the hepatic lymphatic vessels. The hepatic ducts 2120 from the liver 2104 and the
cystic duct 2124 from the gallbladder 21 10 converge to form the common bile duct 2128; all
these ducts are body parts as the term is used herein. Distinguishing these body parts from
each other can be difficult in certain surgical situations. In the depicted embodiment, the LED
system 2088 is directed at the porta hepatis 21 12 during a gallbladder procedure to facilitate
identification of the relevant body parts. Directing lights of different colors at the discrete
body parts can allow the operator more readily to decide which body part is which, a decision
integral to a surgical operation.
A plurality of other applications of these illumination systems can be readily envisioned
by those of ordinary skill in the relevant arts. While the embodiment depicted in Fig 93 A
shows a handheld retractor 2084 being used in an open surgical procedure, the illumination
systems described herein can also be applied to endoscopic surgery, thoracoscopy or laparoscopy. Discrimination among the various body parts in a region such as the porta
hepatis 2112 can be particularly difficult during a laparoscopic procedure. As an alternate
embodiment, the relevant anatomic structures can be illuminated using an LED system affixed
to the instrumentation for laparoscopy, thereby facilitating the identification of the structures
to be resected and the structures to be preserved during the laparoscopic procedure.
Other endoscopic applications will be apparent to those skilled in the art. As
illustrative embodiments, an LED system can be combined with endoscopic instrumentation
for the evaluation of intraluminal anatomy in gastrointestinal organs, in cardiovascular organs,
in tracheobronchial organs or in genitourinary organs. A lumen is understood to be a body part, within the meaning of the latter term The term lumen is understood to refer to a space in the interior of a hollow tubular structure The term body part further comprises the wall of
a hollow tubular structure surrounding the lumen Subcutaneous uses of the illumination
system can be envisioned to allow identification of body parts during endoscopic
musculocutaneous flap elevation Such body parts identified can include nerves, blood vessels,
muscles and other tissues Other embodiments can be readily envisioned by skilled
practitioners without departing from the scope of the systems disclosed herein
In Fig 93 A, the LED system 2088 is shown arrayed at the distal edge of the retractor
2084 mounted on the undersurface of the retracting face 2090 of the retractor 2084 This
arrangement interposes the retracting face 2090 of the retractor 2084 between the body tissue,
here the edge of the liver 2104, and the LED system 2088 so that a retracting force on the
body tissue, here the edge of the liver 2104, does not impinge upon the LED system 2088 The LED system 2088 in the illustrated embodiment is arranged linearly along the retracting
face 2090 of the retractor Here the power cord 2108 is shown integrated with the handle
2106 of the retractor 2084 The systems described herein can be adapted for a plurality of
medical instruments without departing from the scope of the invention For example, a
malleable retractor or a Deaver retractor can bear the LED system Other types of retractors
for specialized surgical applications can similarly be adapted to bear the LED system in any
arrangement with respect to the retracting face that fits the particular surgical need As an
example, an LED system can be mounted on a flexible probe for illuminating a particular tissue
where the probe does not serve the function of retraction In an embodiment, an LED system
can be directed at lymph nodes in the axilla or in the inguinal region following percutaneous
access and subcutaneous dissection, illuminating these lymph nodes with a light color selected
to illuminate a feature of the lymph nodes preferentially, such as their replacement with the melanotic tissue of malignant melanoma; the illumination of the lymph nodes can be simultaneously evaluated through endoscopy or videoendoscopy using minimally invasive
techniques, thereby reducing the need for full operative lymphadenectomy with its consequent
sequelae. This example is offered as an illustration of an embodiment of an application of the
technologies described herein, but other examples and illustrations can be devised by those of
ordinary skill in these arts that fall within the scope of the invention.
A plurality of arrangements of LEDs can be envisioned by those of ordinary skill in
these arts without departing from the scope of the invention. The LED array is capable of
being placed in proximity to the target organ by a surgical instrument. The term proximity as
used herein refers to the degree of propinquity such that the illumination directed at the target
body part is effective in accomplishing the clinical purpose intended by the operator. Thus, the
proximity to the target body part is determined by the medical judgment of the operator. Since the LED system does not produce heat, it can be positioned extremely close to the
target body parts and other body parts without damaging the tissues. In an embodiment, the
illumination assembly is capable of being directed at microsurgical structures without causing
heat damage. The intensity of the light available from an LED system is a feature that
influences how close the LED system needs to be positioned in order to accomplish the
operator's clinical purpose.
As an alternative embodiment, the LED system can be combined with other features on
a medical instrument. The term medical instrument as used herein comprises surgical
instruments. For example, the LED system can be combined with a cautery apparatus or a
smoke aspirator to be used in surgery. Fig 93B depicts one embodiment of a surgical
instrument that combines several other pieces of apparatus with the LED system. In Fig 93B,
a Bovie cautery assembly 2132 is depicted, well-known in the surgical art. The cautery assembly 2132 includes a cautery tip 2134 and a handheld wand 2138. Imbedded in the wand 2138 in standard fashion is an array of control buttons 2140, an arrangement familiar to those
in the art. At the distal tip of the handheld wand 2138 is a LED system 2144. The power and
data signals to the LED system 2144 are carried through a LED cable 2148 affixed to the
superior aspect of the handheld wand 2138. The LED cable 2148 joins with the Bovie power
cord 2152 at the proximal end of the instrument to form a single united device cable 2150. In
an alternate embodiment, the LED cable can be contained within the Bovie wand housing
2136 in proximity to the Bovie power cord 2152.
The depicted embodiment permits the surgeon to direct LED light at a particular
structure to identify it anatomically as part of cautery dissection. The spectral capacity of the
LED system 2144 is useful in identifying blood vessels, for example. Blood vessels embedded
in tissues can be especially difficult to identify. The surgeon can dissect with the cautery tip
2134 of the illustrated embodiment while directing a light from the LED that is selected to highlight vascular structures. The tissues themselves would be distinguishable from the
vascular structures based on the response of each set of structures to the light illumination
from the LED system 2144. The contrast between tissues requiring dissection and blood
vessels to be preserved would be highlighted by the light illumination from the LED system
2144. The surgeon, therefore, would be able to identify what structures are safe to transgress
with cautery dissection. In this way, the surgeon could preserve blood vessels more readily, as
required by the surgical procedure. Alternatively, the surgeon could identify blood vessels
imbedded in tissues and take precautions to coagulate or ligate them effectively before
transgressing them. The illustrated embodiment represents only one possible arrangement of
combined surgical instrumentation that employs an LED system. Other arrangements can be
envisioned by those of ordinary skill in these arts. For specialized surgical applications, specialized combinations can be required. For example, particular instruments are employed in neurosurgery and in microsurgery. The same principles illustrated in the depicted embodiment
of Fig 93B can be applied in the fabrication of surgical instruments appropriate for these
purposes.
As an alternate embodiment, the LED system can be combined with a sensor system
that provides signals that correlate with some characteristic of the body part being illuminated.
As an example, Fig 93 C shows an LED assembly 2100 affixed to a nasal endoscope 2092
being inserted transnasally 2094 to evaluate an intranasal or a pituitary tumor 2098. The
endoscope 2092 is shown in this figure entering through the naris 2096 and being passed
through the nasal airway 2086. The tumor 2098 is here shown at the superior aspect of the
nasal airway 2086. The LED assembly 2100 can comprise an LED system (not shown) and a
sensor system (not shown). The LED system can illuminate the intranasal and intrasellar
structures with a range of colors, while the sensor system can provide data relating to the
characteristics of the reflected light. The tumor 2098 can be identified by how it reflects the range of light being used to illuminate it. The sensor system can provide information about the
characteristics of the reflected light, permitting the operator to identify the tumor 2098 in
these remote locations. Further, such an endoscope 2092 can be combined with means
familiar to practitioners in these arts for resecting or ablating a lesion.
The illumination system described herein is available for both direct illumination and
transillumination. Transillumination is understood to refer to the method for examining a
tissue, an anatomical structure or a body organ by the passage of light through it. For
example, transilluminating a structure can help determine whether it is a cystic or a solid
structure. One embodiment of an illumination system can employ LEDs to direct light of
differing colors through a structure, whereby the appearance of the structure when subjected to such transillumination can contribute to its identification or diagnosis. Transillumination using LED light can be directed to a plurality of structures. In addition to soft tissues and
organs, teeth can be transilluminated to evaluate their integrity. An additional embodiment can
employ a LED as an indwelling catheter in a luminal structure such as a duct. Illuminating the
structure's interior can assist the surgeon in confirming its position during surgery. For
example, in certain surgical circumstances, the position of the ureter is difficult to determine.
Transilluminating the ureter using an LED system placed within its lumen can help the surgeon
find the ureter during the dissection and avoid traumatizing it. Such an LED system could be
placed cystoscopically, for example, as a catheter in a retrograde manner before commencing
the open part of the operative procedure. In this embodiment, the LED system is particularly
useful: not only can the color of the LED be varied in order to maximize the visibility of the
transilluminated structure, but also the LED avoids the tissue-heating problem that
accompanies traditional light sources.
Evaluation of a tissue illuminated by an embodiment of the illuminating system
described herein can take place through direct inspection. In an alternative embodiment,
evaluation can take place through examining the tissues using videocameras. In an illustrative
embodiment, the tissues would be visualized on a screen. Color adjustments on the video
monitor screen can enhance the particular effect being evaluated by the operating team. As an
alternative embodiment, the illuminating system can be combined with a sensor module, as
partially described above, whereby the intensity of the reflected light can be measured. As
examples, a sensor module could provide for spectroscopic, colorometric or
spectrophotometric analysis of the light signals reflected from the illuminated area. Other
types of sensor modules can be devised by those skilled in the relevant arts. A sensor module
can be combined with direct inspection for evaluating tissues. Alternatively, a sensor module can provide a means for remote evaluation of tissues in areas not available for direct inspection
as a substitute for or as an adjunct to video visualization Examples of such areas are well-
known in the surgical arts Examples of such areas can include transnasal endoscopic access
to the pituitary, endoscopic evaluation of the cerebral ventricles, and intraspinal endoscopy,
although other areas can be identified by those familiar with the particular anatomic regions
and relevant methods of surgical access. In addition to the abovementioned embodiments for
use in living tissues, embodiments can be devised to permit evaluation of forensic tissues or
pathology specimens using the illuminating systems disclosed herein
Fig 93 D depicts an embodiment of the illumination system wherein the LED system
2154 is mounted within a traditional surgical headlamp 2158 apparatus. In the illustrated
embodiment, the LED system 2154 is affixed to the headband 2160 using methods of attachment well-known to practitioners Advantageously, however, the LED system 2154 of
the illustrated embodiment can be considerably lighter in weight than traditional headlamps.
This reduces strain for the wearer and makes the headlamp apparatus more comfortable during
long procedures. As depicted herein, the LED system 2154 is connected to a power cord
2156. In distinction to traditional headlamp apparatus, however, the power cord 2156 for the
LED system 2154 is lightweight and non-bulky. The power cord 2156 can therefore be
deployed around the headband 2160 itself, without having to be carried above the surgeon's
head in a configuration that predisposes to torquing the headband and that collides with pieces
of overhead equipment in the operating room. Furthermore, the power cord employed
by the LED system avoids the problems inherent in the fiberoptic systems currently known in
the surgical arts. In the traditional surgical headlamp as employed by practitioners in these
arts, light is delivered to the lamp through a plurality of fiberoptic filaments bundled in a cable
With the systems known presently in the art, individual fiberoptic filaments are readily fractured during normal use, with a concomitant decrease in the intensity of the light generated by the headlamp. By contrast, the power cord 2156 for the LED system 2154 does not
contain fiberoptic elements but rather contains a wire carrying power to the LED system 2154.
This provides a more durable illumination unit than those known in the present art.
Furthermore, the LED system 2154 is sufficiently lightweight that it is capable of being
integrated with the surgeon's magnifying loupes 2164.
Although the LED system in the illustrated embodiment is affixed to a headband 2160,
an alternative embodiment can permit eliminating the headband 2160 entirely and integrating
the LED system 2154 in the surgeon's spectacles or magnifying loupes 2164. Fig 93E depicts
an embodiment of this latter arrangement. In this embodiment, an LED system 2166 is shown
integrated with the frame 2168 of the loupes 2164. The LED system 2166 can be situated
superiorly on the frame 2168 as depicted in this figure, or it can be arranged in any spatial
relation to the frame 2168 that is advantageous for illuminating aspects of the surgical field. In
this embodiment, the power cord 2162 can be positioned to follow the templepiece 2170 of the loupes 2164.
The methods of the present invention comprise methods for diagnosing a condition of a body part. The methods for diagnosing a condition of a body part comprise selecting an area
of the body part for evaluation, illuminating the area with an LED system, determining
characteristics of the light reflected from the body part, and comparing the characteristics with
known characteristics, wherein the known characteirstics relate to the condition of the body
part. These methods can be applied to normal, nonpathological conditions of a body part.
Alternatively, these methods can be used to identify pathological conditions of the body part. It is understood that different body parts reflect light differently, depending upon their anatomic or physiological condition. For example, when subjected to room light, an ischemic
body part can be perceived to be a purplish color, a color termed "dusky" or "cyanotic" by
practitioners in these arts. Ischemia can therefore be at times diagnosed by direct inspection
under room light. However, a multitude of situations exist where the vascular status of a body
part cannot be evaluated by inspection under room light. For example, ischemia can be hard
to see in muscles or in red organs. Further, skin ischemia is difficult to evaluate in room light
in people with dark skins. The methods of the present invention include practices that permit
the diagnosis of ischemia to be made by illuminating a body part with an LED system and
comparing the reflected light with known light characteristics indicative of ischemia. These
methods further can permit this diagnosis to be made at an earlier stage, when room light may not reveal color changes but when LED system illumination can permit the perception of more
subtle color changes. A spectrometer or another sort of sensor system can be optionally
employed to evaluate the color and/or the intensity of the light reflected from the illuminated
body part. For example, the systems and methods of the present invention can be adapted for
the diagnosis of early circulatory compromise following vascular procedures. Common
vascular procedures which can be complicated by circulatory compromise include surgical
vascular reconstructions or revascularizations, surgical replantations, free tissue transfers,
embolectomies, percutaneous angioplasties and related endovascular procedures, and medical
thrombolytic therapies. The systems and methods disclosed herein can be adapted for the
evaluation of tissues within the body by providing an LED system capable of implantation and
removal and by providing a sensor system capable of implantation and removal, the former
system adapted for directing illumination at a body part within the body and the latter system
adapted for receiving color data from the light that is reflected or absorbed by the target body part. Systems and methods adapted for the evaluation of internal body parts can be
advantageous in the monitoring of buried free flaps, for example. The lack of heat generated
by the LED system makes it feasible to implant it without subjecting the surrounding tissues to
heat trauma. Practitioners skilled in the relevant arts can identify other conditions besides
ischemia that can be diagnosed using the methods disclosed herein. The full spectrum of light
available from the LED systems disclosed herein is particularly advantageous for diagnosis of
a plurality of conditions.
As a further example of the methods described herein, the LED system can be used to
illuminate the retina for ophthalmological examination. Variation in light color can facilitate
ophthalmological examination, for example the diagnosis of retinal hemorrhage or the
evaluation of the retinal vessels. Practitioners of these arts will be able to envision other forms
of retinopathy that are suitable for diagnosis using these methods. In one embodiment, an
LED system can be integrated in a slit lamp apparatus for ophthalmological examination. In an additional embodiment, the LED system can be adapted for use in ophthalmological
surgery. As an example, the LED system is capable of assisting in the localization of mature
and hypermature cataracts, and is capable of assisting in the surgical extraction of cataracts.
One practice of these methods for diagnosing a condition of a body part can comprise
administering an agent to the patient that will be delivered to the body part, whereby the agent
alters the characteristic of the light reflected from the body part. An agent is any bioactive
substance available for administration into the patient's tissues. An agent can include a drug, a
radioisotope, a vitamin, a vital dye, a microorganism, a cell, a protein, a chemical, or any other
substance understood to be bioactive. An agent can be administered by any route which will
permit the agent to be delivered to the body part being evaluated. Administration can include
intravenous injection, intramuscular injection, intraarterial injection, ingestion, inhalation, topical application, intrathecal delivery, intraluminal or intravesical delivery, subcutaneous delivery or any other route. The full spectrum of light provided by the systems and methods
disclosed herein is advantageously employed in conjunction with certain administered agents.
An example of an agent known to alter the characteristic of light reflected from a body
part is fluoroscein, a vital dye applied topically for ophthalmic purposes or injected
intravenously to evaluate vascular perfusion. When illuminated by a Wood's lamp, fluoroscein
glows green. Wood's lamp, though, is not adaptable to many surgical situations because of its
physical configuration. Fluoroscein administered to remote body parts cannot be illuminated
by a Wood's lamp, nor can the fluorescence be seen in a body part too remote to inspect.
Illuminating the tissues with an LED system after the administration of a vital dye such as
fluoroscein can produce a characteristic pattern of reflected light. This reflected light can be
evaluated by direct visualization, by remote visualization or by a light sensor system. Other agents will be familiar to those of skill in these arts, whereby their administration permits the
evaluation of a body part subjected to LED illumination.
As one example, gliomas are understood to have a different uptake of vital dye than
other brain tissues. Directing an LED system at a glioma after the administration of vital dye
can permit more complete excision of the tumor with preservation of surrounding normal brain
tissue. This excision can be performed under the operating microscope, to which can be
affixed the LED system for illuminating the brain tissues. The lack of heat generation by the
LED system makes it particularly advantageous in this setting. As an additional example, the
LED system can be combined with fluoroscein dye applied topically to the surface of the eye
for ophthalmological evaluation. As yet another example, the LED system combined with
fluoroscein can permit diagnosis of ischemia in patients whose skin pigmentation may prevent
the evaluation of skin ischemia using traditional methods such as Wood's lamp illumination. As disclosed in part above, these systems and methods can advantageously be directed towards body parts within the human body for evaluation of those body parts after the
administration of an agent taken up by the body part.
The methods according to the present invention can be directed towards effecting a
change in a material. In a practice of these methods, a change in a material can be effected by
providing an LED system, selecting a range of colors from the spectrum that are known to
produce the change in the material being illuminated, and illuminating the material with the
LED system for a period of time predetermined to be effective in producing that change. The
methods disclosed herein are directed to a plurality of materials, both non-biological materials
and biological entities. A biological entity can include a living organism. A living organism
can include a vertebrate. A living organism can include an invertebrate. A biological entity can be treated with light exposure in order to effect a change in its structure, physiology or
psychology. For example, persons afflicted with the depressive syndrome termed seasonal
affective disorder are understood to be benefited psychologically by exposure to illumination with light of known characteristics for predetermined periods of time. The illumination can be
provided directly to the living organism, for example to the person with seasonal affective
disorder. Alternatively, the illumination can be provided to the environment surrounding the
person. For example, illumination can be provided by a room light comprising an LED system
that can provide light with the predetermined characteristics.
As a practice of these methods, a condition of a patient can be treated. This practice
can comprise providing an LED system, selecting a set of colors that produce a therapeutic
effect and illuminating an area of the patient with the set of colors. A therapeutic effect is
understood to be any effect that improves health or well-being. According to this practice, a
pathological condition can be treated. Alternatively, a normal condition can be treated to effect an enhanced state of well-being The area being illuminated can include the external
surface of the patient, to wit, the skin or any part of the skin The external surface of the
patient can be illuminated directly or via ambient illumination in the environment These
methods can be likewise applied to internal body parts of a patient
Fig 94 shows a practice of these methods This figure depicts a patient 2180 afflicted
with a lesion 2172 on an external surface, here shown to be his cheek 2174 A LED system
2178 is directed to provide direct illumination to the lesion 2172 Here the LED system 2178
is shown affixed to the distal end of a positioning system 2182 Other arrangements for
positioning the LED system can be envisioned by those of ordinary skill in these arts It is
understood that illumination of dermatological lesions with different spectra of light can have
therapeutic effect For example, acne, Bowen's disease of the penis and certain other skin
cancers have responded to treatment with illumination As another example, certain intranasal conditions are understood to respond to illumination therapies In one practice of these
methods, an agent can be administered to the patient that alters or increases the therapeutic
effect of the set of colors of light directed towards the area being treated
A vaπety of agents are familiar to practitioners in the arts relating to phototherapy and
photodynamic therapy Photodynamic therapy (PDT) is understood to compπse certain
procedures that include the steps of administering an agent to a patient and illuminating the
patient with a light source Laser light is typically involved in PDT Since the illumination
provided by the LED system can provide full spectrum lighting, including infrared, visible and
ultraviolet light spectra, the LED system is available for those therapeutic applications that rely
on non-visible light wavelengths A number of applications of topical illumination have been
described in the relevant arts LED technology has the additional advantage of avoiding heat
generation, so prolonged illumination can be accomplished without tissue damage Although the practice depicted in Fig 94 shows an LED system 2178 directed towards
the skin of a patient 2180, various practices of this method can apply an LED system for
illuminating body parts. Treatment can be directed towards internal or external body parts
using modalities familiar to practitioners for accessing the particular body part. As described
above, open surgical techniques or endoscopic techniques can be employed to access internal
body parts. For example, an intraluminal tumor can be treated using these methods as applied
through an endoscope such as a colonoscope or a cystoscope. Alternatively, illumination
therapy can be provided following or during a surgical procedure. For example, following
surgical extirpation of a tumor, an agent can be administered that is taken up by the residual
microscopic tumor in the field and the surgical field can be illuminated by an LED system to
sterilize any remaining tumor nodules. These methods can be employed palliatively for reducing tumor burden after gross excision. As another practice, these methods can be
directed towards metastatic lesions that can be accessed directly or endoscopically.
These embodiments described herein are merely illustrative. A variety of embodiments
pertaining to precision illumination can be envisioned by ordinary skilled practitioners in these
arts without departing from the scope of the present invention.
In other embodiments of the present invention, LEDs are used to create attractive and
useful ornamental or aesthetic effects. Such applications include disposition of the LEDs in
various environments, such as those disclosed above, including multicolor, LED-based
eyeglass rims, an LED-lit screwdriver, a multi color light source for artistic lamps or displays,
such as a multicolor LED source for a Lava® lamp, and LED-based ornamental fire or fire log
with a simulated fire flicker pattern and coloring, a light-up toothbrush or hairbrush using
LEDs or other lighting devices. LEDs may also be disposed on ceiling fan blades for to create
unusual lighting patterns for artistic effects or display. In particular, pattern generation may be possible with addition of LEDs to the blades of a fan. Also in accordance with the present
invention are an LED-based ornamental simulated candle, a multicolor, LED-based light rope,
an LED battery charge indicator and an LED color sensor feedback mechanism, through
which an LED may respond to tension, temperature, pressure, cavitation, temperature, or
moisture. Thus, an LED disposed near the body can serve as a skin temperature and skin
moisture feedback color mechanism. Also provided is an LED-based multicolor hand held
wand or indicator light. In particular, wands are provided that are similar to the popular glow
sticks, which are widely used in the modern dance / night clubs and for dance expression.
Multicolor electronic versions allow color control features as well as remote synchronization
via a master lighting controller, provided that the LEDs are connected to a receiver and the
master controller includes a transmitter. The LED-based personal devices are reusable, unlike
chemically based current devices. The master controller may also control other LED items,
such as drink coasters made of LEDs, in a controlled, synchronized manner. Such controllers can be used to control an LED disco ball, in which LEDs are disposed on the exterior or a
sphere or other three-dimensional shape and may be controlled to simulate the flashing of a
conventional disco ball. For example, effect simulated by the ball include ball strobe, spot
movement, color changing, line lighting and plane lighting.
The present invention permits the user to control LEDs at the individual diode level.
The effects that may be produced by generating light of a range of colors within the spectrum
permit a number of useful applications in a wide range of technological fields. Among other
effects, the controlled LEDs can produce color washes that can be instantly varied discretely
or continuously over a wide range of colors and intensities, and that can flash or strobe with a
wide range of frequencies. Applying a continuous range of color washes results in a number
of unusual effects, some of which are aesthetically appealing, functionally valuable, or both. For example, affecting the same object with light of different colors may yield a very different
appearance, as is readily apparent when, for example, a white object is shown under a so-
called "black light." An observer viewing the object will perceive a change of color in the
object being observed. Thus, a red object illuminated with a red light appears very different
from a red object illuminated with a blue light. The former may be a vivid red, whereas the
latter may appear purple or black. When objects having color contrast are viewed under
colored lights, quite different effects may result. For example, a red and white checkerboard
pattern may appear completely red under a red light, while the checkerboard pattern is evident
under a white light. By strobing red and white light in an alternating time sequence over such
a pattern, the white squares on the checkerboard will seem to appear and disappear. More
complex patterns, such as those in multi-color paintings, can result in remarkable effects, such as disappearing and reappearing figures, or figures that undergo dramatic color changes to an
observer. The appearance of movement, color change and appearance and disappearance can
result in animation-like effects from a single still photograph, painting, design, or image, merely as a result of controlled lighting changes. Similarly, selecting appropriate light
conditions can result in dramatic changes in the relative contrast of different-colored items.
Items that have little contrast under certain lighting conditions may be perceived to have
dramatic contrast under different color conditions. Furthermore, the spectrum of the light
produced according to embodiments of the present invention extends to infrared and
ultraviolet light, allowing the incorporation of effects such as fluorescence into the display.
The lighting changes employed may be pre-programmed, or may be responsive to the
environment of the lighting system, such as to the proximity of people, to the ambient lighting
conditions, to the location of the display, or to the time of day. As an example, in Fig. 95 at the top, the numeral 88 is intended to represent such a numeral that is colored with green in the top half of the eights (3100) and red in the bottom
half of the eights (3150). When lit with white light, the numeral 88 so colored will appear to
have green in the top half (3100) and red in the bottom half (3150). When lit with green light,
as shown in the middle of Fig. 95, the top half of the 88 (3100) still will appear green, but the
bottom half (3150), originally red, will appear black. When lit with red light, as shown at the
bottom of Fig. 95, the top half of the 88 (3100), originally green, will appear black, and the
bottom half (3150) will appear red. Thus, by gradually changing the color of the illumination,
the different portions of the numeral will alternately stand out and fade to black. As will be apparent to a person of ordinary skill in the art, this technique can be used to create images
designed to appear and disappear as the color of the illuminating light is altered. In addition,
other color effects can be produced. For example, shining blue light on the two halves of the
numeral would produce a blue-green color in the top half 3100 of the numeral and a purple
color in the bottom half 3150. As a second example, Fig. 96 at the top shows a pair of interlocking circles (left 3200,
right 3205). When lit with white light, as shown at the top, the drawing is intended to
represent the following colors: the left crescent (3210) represents green, the right crescent
(3220) represents red, the overlapping area (3230) is black, and the background (3240) is
white. When lit with green light, as shown in the middle of Fig. 96, the left crescent (3210)
appears green, the right crescent (3220), originally red, is now black, the overlapping area
(3230) remains black, and the background (3240), originally white, appears green. Thus, the
left crescent (3210) can no longer be distinguished from the background (3240), and the entire
rightmost circle (3205) now appears black. When lit with red light, as shown at the bottom of
Fig. 96, the left crescent (3210), originally green, now appears black, the right crescent (3220) appears red, the overlapping area (3230) appears black, and the background (3240), originally white, now appears red. Thus, the right crescent (3220) can no longer be distinguished from
the background (3240) and the leftmost circle (3200) appears black. By changing the color of
the illumination from green to red over time, the circle appears to move from right to left,
imparting the illusion of motion to an observer. A skilled artisan will appreciate that variations
upon this example will allow the creation of myriad displays that function in a like manner,
permitting animation effects to be produced from a single image or object.
The nature of the lighting system of the present invention permits gradual changes of
color from one side of a system to another. Furthermore, the color change can progress
gradually along the system, effectively simulating motion of the color change. Additionally, the
light can be delivered in a constant manner, or by flashing or strobing the lights. Flashing can
also be programmed to occur with simultaneous change of color. These abilities, which can be
directed by a microprocessor, can grant additional impetus and vitality to the effects described above.
It will also be apparent that similar effects can be obtained by passing colored light
through a transparent or translucent colored screen, such as a stained glass window or a
photographic slide, placed between the light source and an observer.
It will also be obvious to the skilled artisan that these effects can be used in more
complex displays to create eye-catching illusions of motion and phantom objects that
alternately emerge from and fade into the background. Such effects are particularly
advantageous when used in applications such as museum exhibits, dioramas, display cases,
retail displays, vending machines, display signs, information boards (including traffic
information signs, silent radios, scoreboards, price boards, and advertisement boards),
advertising displays, and other situations where the attracting the attention of observers is desired. Because the light generated according to embodiments of the present invention can include ultraviolet and infrared light, the objects can incorporate effects such as fluorescence
that are particular to illumination with such light.
A vending machine, as contemplated by the present invention, is an apparatus which
dispenses products contained therein, such as a soda machine, a snack machine, a gumball
machine, a cigarette machine, a condom machine, or a novelty dispenser. Illumination
provided according to the present invention can be used to attract the attention of an observer
in a variety of ways. For example, a hypothetical olive-dispensing vending machine (3300)
using a dove as a logo is depicted in Fig. 97. As seen in standard white light, depicted at the
top of Fig. 97, the backing of the machine (3310) is white, the body of the dove (3320) is
black, an upper set of wings (3330) are intended to be green, and a lower set of wings (3340)
are intended to be red. When the color of the lighting in the machine is changed to red as in
the middle of Fig. 97, the lower set of wings (3340), originally red, are invisible against the backing (3310) ,which now appears red. The upper set of wings (3330), originally green,
appear black under red light, and so the image of the dove appears black with wings raised.
When the color of the lighting in the machine is changed to green as shown in the bottom of
Fig. 97, the upper set of wings (3330), originally green, now are invisible against the backing
(3310), which now appears green. The lower set of wings (3340), originally red, now appear
black in green light. Thus, the image of the dove appears black with wings raised. In this
manner, the image of the dove appears to flap its wings, even though there is no actual
motion. The illusion is created simply by changing the color of the light. It should be
recognized that much more complicated effects can be produced by using of objects of many
different colors and illuminating the objects with a wide variety of colors within the spectrum,
ranging from infrared, to visible, to ultraviolet. The vending machine of this and related embodiments may include an LED system (3370) illuminating the vending machine. The LED system may, in embodiments, include a
light module 100, a smart light bulb 701 , or another embodiment of an LED system, such as
those disclosed herein. Accordingly, the LED system may have one or more of the
characteristics and provide one or more of the functions of the various other embodiments
disclosed elsewhere herein. It should be noted that the light source need not be disposed inside
the vending machine, but may be placed outside the vending machine in any position that
permits the light source to illuminate the vending machine. Those skilled in the art will
recognize many opportunities for designing displays to take advantage of the color-changing
attributes of the lighting systems of the present invention.
As another technique available to the olive distributor of the above example, objects or
designs may be made to appear and disappear as the color of light is changed. If the olive distributor should name its dove 'Oliver', this name might appear in the vending machine
(3300) as shown in Fig. 98. The backing of the vending machine (3310) is white (Fig. 98, top),
and displayed thereon are a dove (3350) colored red and the dove's name, Oliver', (3360) in
green lettering. When the lighting in the vending machine is changed to green (Fig. 98, center),
the lettering (3360) disappears against the green background (3310), while the dove (3350)
appears black. When the lighting is changed to red (Fig. 98, bottom), the dove (3350)
disappears against the background, which now also appears red, and the lettering (3360)
appears black. Thus, by changing only the color of the light, the display in the vending
machine varies between a dove, and the dove's name. This sort of a display is eye-catching,
and therefore useful for advertising purposes.
Additionally, attention-grabbing effects can be achieved independent of a specific
display tailored to take advantage of the color-changing properties of the lighting system of the present invention. The lights may be positioned within or about the display such that the
color changes of the lights themselves serve to draw attention to the display. In one
embodiment, the lights are positioned behind the display, such as behind a non-opaque backing
of a vending machine, so that changing the color of the light is sufficient to attract attention
from observers.
The above examples are intended for illustration only, and are not limiting with respect
to the scope of the present invention. Those skilled in the art will readily devise other ways of
using the lighting systems disclosed herein to achieve a variety of effects which attract the
attention of observers, and these effects are encompassed by the present invention.
The present invention permits the user to change the lighting environment by strobing
between different colors while taking feedback or spectrum sensor data from the surrounding environment. Such strobes may include a variable-cycle frequency color washing strobing
effect using arrayed LEDs. The strobes may thus flash rapidly between colors, or may slowly
change throughout the spectrum in a programmed order. The strobing effect can make
otherwise unremarkable objects appear quite distinct and aesthetically appealing. Moreover,
objects such as paintings may appear to become quite animated when periodically strobed with
different colors of light. The attractive illumination effects of the variable frequency strobe
permit improved, dynamic lighting environments in areas where lighting is attractive to
customers, such as in retail stores, restaurants, museums and the like. The effect may be
particularly useful in conjunction with the display of art, such as in art galleries, where known
works of art may be radically changed by different lighting conditions. With works of art, for
example, the lighting conditions may be controlled to reproduce the light intended by the
creator, such as sunlight. Furthermore, the lighting system of the present invention can be used
to project infrared .and ultraviolet light, in addition to the more common visible wavelengths, and these uncommon frequencies can be used to induce fluorescence and other interesting effects.
In one embodiment of the invention, digitally-controlled, LED-based lights according
to the present invention are used to illuminate a non-opaque object for display purposes. In
one aspect of the invention, the object is a container containing a fluid, both of which may be
substantially transparent. In one aspect, the container is a bottle of gin, vodka, rum, water,
soda water, soft drink, or other beverage. An example of such a display is depicted in Fig. 99,
wherein a beverage container (3500) is placed on a platform (3510) lit by an LED system
(3370). Furthermore, the light source may be disposed on a coaster, to illuminate an individual
drink from below. The LED system may, in embodiments, include a light module 100, a smart
light bulb 701, or another embodiment of an LED system, such as those disclosed herein.
Accordingly, the LED system may have one or more of the characteristics and provide one or
more of the functions of the various other embodiments disclosed elsewhere herein. In another aspect, the object is a tank of substantially transparent liquid, such as a fish tank or aquarium.
In yet another aspect, the object is a non-opaque solid object, such as an ice sculpture, glass
figurine, crystal workpiece, or plastic statue. In another aspect, the light source is placed into a
Lava® Lamp to provide illumination thereof.
The present invention also permits projection of attractive effects or works of art. In
particular, in an embodiment of the present invention, a LED-based illumination source is used
for projection images or patterns. This system may utilize an LED light source with a series of
lenses and/or diffusers, an object containing distinct transparent and opaque areas such as a
pattern, stencil, gobo, photographic slide, LCD display, micro-mirror device, or the like, and a
final shaping lens. Only the light source, the patterned object, and a surface to receive the
projection are necessary for this embodiment. This embodiment, for example, can be used to project a logo or sign onto a ceiling, floor, or wall, or onto a sidewalk outside of a business.
In an alternate embodiment, the light may be projected on a cloud, a screen, or a fabric
surface. The present invention is particularly advantageous in this regard, because it permits
variation of the color of the projection coupled with a light source that does not generate heat.
The color strobe effect of the present invention may be used to create improved display
case lighting, such as multicolor display case lighting. The lighting may be provided as part of
a modular lighting system or in a standalone control panel. In general, the present lighting
system may be used to alter lighting environment, such as work environments, museums,
restaurants and the like. In certain applications, special lighting is required, such as in
museums, where low UV lighting or heatless lighting may be needed. In other applications,
such as cooled display cases, or illuminating edible objects such as food, the heatless light
sources of the present invention offer advantages over standard incandescent lighting, which
emits significant amounts of heat, while providing light of variable color. Standard fluorescent
lighting, which also generates little heat, is often considered to look unappealing. The present
invention projects attractive lighting of a controlled, variable spectrum without accompanying heat, while maintaining the flexibility to change the parameters of the generated light.
LED systems of the present invention may be imbedded in articles of clothing to permit
light to be projected from the clothing (Fig. 100). The LEDs may be mounted on a flexible
circuit board and covered with latex, vinyl, plastic, cotton, etc. This embodiment includes a
method for creating light weight flexible material suited for the construction of clothing.
Sandwich of fabrics and silicone are provided, which then are lit by an LED. Conventional
clothing using LEDs includes discrete LEDs in the form of words or patterns formed by the
points of light. The LED-based clothing of the present invention may light clothing fabric
without protruding. The LED-based clothing of the present invention may be controlled via a radio frequency or infrared signal by a remote control or a master controller having a
transmitter element. The clothing can be made to fit the wearer in a manner that permits
disposition of the LEDs in close proximity over the body, permitting the user's external
appearance to be modified, for example to simulate an appearance, such as nudity or a
particular type of clothing. The clothing can be paired with a sensor to allow the LED system
to display a condition of the user, such as heart rate, or the like.
The utility of such clothing can be manifested in many ways. An LED display so
disposed in the clothing can be used purely for effect, to generate dazzling patterns, visual
effects, and the like. The LED displays can represent real-world images, such as the
surrounding environment, or may simply reflect surrounding conditions by changing color in
response to external data such as temperature, lighting conditions, or pressure. These displays
might also be responsive to the proximity of a similar garment, or might receive data from transmitters in the environment. In one embodiment, the display on the clothing is responsive
to pressure. Clothing of this embodiment might be worn in a sporting event to provide visual
evidence of illegal contact. For example, in the game of baseball, a batter who is struck by the
ball would have visible evidence thereof on the portion of clothing so struck. Furthermore, the clothing could include appropriate processors to enable recent data to be repeated on the
clothing, effectively creating an 'instant replay' of the previous event. Clothing of these and
related embodiments may include the sensors required for such responsive requirements.
In yet another embodiment, the display on the clothing could be a medical imaging
display. Data from magnetic resonance imaging, for example, could be represented in three
dimensions on the surface of clothing worn by the patient as an aid to physicians visualizing
the information. Similarly, such clothing could serve as a wearable video screen for any
application, such as television, video games, and related displays. The clothing could also be programmed to display a series of predetermined images. For example, pictures might be taken of a person wearing a series of outfits, the person might put on LED display clothing, the
picture data might be adjusted for optimal correspondence with the LED clothing, and then
the images might be serially displayed on the clothing to simulate instantaneous changes of
clothing. Images may also be controlled remotely. Those skilled in the art will envision many
related applications of this embodiment.
While the invention has been disclosed in connection with the preferred embodiments
shown and described in detail, various modifications and improvements thereon will become
readily apparent to those skilled in the art. Accordingly, the spirit and scope of the present
invention is to be limited only by the following claims.

Claims

What is claimed is
1 A modular LED unit comprising
a light module having an LED with a plurality of light-emitting semiconductor dies for
generating a range of colors within a spectrum, and
a processor for controlling an amount of electπcal current supplied to the plurality of
semiconductor dies, so that a particular amount of current supplied thereto generates a
corresponding color within the spectrum
2 A modular LED unit as set forth in claim 1 further including a power module for
providing electrical current from a power source to the light module
3 A modular LED unit as set forth in claim 2 wherein the light module includes an
electrical connector for removably coupling the light module to the power module
4 A modular LED unit as set forth in claim 1 further including means for programming
the processor
5 A modular LED unit as set forth in claim 1 further including a mechanism for
facilitating communication between the light module and the processor
6 A modular LED unit comprising
a light module having a plurality of LEDs, each LED being provided with a plurality of
light-emitting semiconductor dies for generating a range of colors within a spectrum,
a data communication link for connecting the plurality of LEDs, and
a processor for controlling the amount of electπcal current supplied to the plurality of
semiconductor dies in each LED, so that a particular amount of current supplied thereto
generates a corresponding color within the spectrum
7 A modular LED unit as set forth in claim 6, wherein the light module includes a
receiver for facilitating communication between the processor and the light module
8. A modular LED unit as set forth in claim 7. wherein the light module further includes a transmitter for facilitating communication with the processor.
9. A modular LED unit as set forth in claim 6 further including a power module for
providing electrical current from a power source to the light module.
10. A modular LED unit as set forth in claim 9 further including an electrical connector for
removably coupling the light module to the power module.
11. A modular LED unit as set forth in claim 6, wherein the plurality of LEDs in the light
module is arranged linearly in series within a strip.
12. A modular LED unit as set forth in claim 11, wherein the strip of LEDs includes a
mechanism to permit coupling of a plurality of strips between modular LED units.
13. A modular LED unit as set forth in claim 6, wherein the plurality of LEDs in the light
module is arranged in within a geometrical panel.
14. A modular LED unit as set forth in claim 13, wherein the geometrical panel of LEDs
includes a mechanism to permit coupling of a plurality of panels between modular LED units. 15. A modular LED unit as set forth in claim 6, wherein the plurality of LEDs in the light
module is arranged to represent a three-dimensional structure
16. A modular LED unit as set forth in claim 15, wherein the three-dimensional structure
of LEDs includes a mechanism to permit coupling of a plurality of three-dimensional
structures between modular LED units.
17. A modular LED unit as set forth in claims 12, 14 or 16, wherein the coupling
mechanism permits electrical and mechanical coupling between modular LED units.
18. A modular LED unit comprising:
a plurality of light emitting diodes (LEDs) of at least two different colors for
generating a range of colors within a spectrum; a processor for controlling the amount of electrical current supplied to the plurality of
light emitting diodes, so that a particular amount of current supplied thereto generates a
corresponding color within the spectrum; and
a power module for providing electrical current from a power source to the light
module.
19. A modular LED unit as set forth in claim 18 further including an electrical connector
for removably coupling the light module to the power module.
20. A modular LED unit as set forth in claim 18, wherein the light module includes a
receiver for facilitating communication between the processor and the light module.
21. A modular LED unit as set forth in claim 20, wherein the light module further includes a transmitter for facilitating communication with the processor.
22. A modular LED unit as set forth in claim 18, wherein the plurality of light emitting diodes in the light module is arranged linearly in series within a strip.
23. A modular LED unit as set forth in claim 22, wherein the strip of light emitting diodes
includes a mechanism to permit coupling of a plurality of strips between modular LED units.
24. A modular LED unit as set forth in claim 18, wherein the plurality of light emitting
diodes in the light module is arranged in within a geometrical panel.
25. A modular LED unit as set forth in claim 24, wherein the geometrical panel of LEDs
includes a mechanism to permit coupling of a plurality of panels between modular LED units.
26. A modular LED unit as set forth in claim 18, wherein the plurality of light emitting
diodes in the light module is arranged to represent a three-dimensional structure
27. A modular LED unit as set forth in claim 26, wherein the three dimension structure of
light emitting diodes includes a mechanism to permit coupling of a plurality of three-
dimensional structures between modular LED units.
28. A modular LED unit as set forth in claims 23, 25 or 27, wherein the coupling mechanism permits electrical and mechanical coupling between modular LED units.
29. A method for illumination within an environment, the method comprising:
providing a modular LED unit as set forth in claims 1, 6 or 18;
placing the modular LED unit within the environment; and
controlling the amount of electrical current supplied to at least one LED, so that a
particular amount of current supplied thereto generates a corresponding color within the
spectrum.
30. A method as set forth in claim 29, wherein the environment includes a handheld
flashlight.
31. A method as set forth in claim 29, wherein the environment includes one which
requires the use of an indicator light.
32. A method as set forth in claim 31 , wherein the environment is selected from a group consisting of an elevator floor button, an elevator floor indication panel, an automobile
dashboard, an automobile ignition key area, an automobile anti-theft alarm light indicator,
units of a stereo systems, a telephone pad button, and answering machine message indicator, a door bell button, a light status switch, a computer status indicator, a video monitor status
indicator, and a watch.
33. A method as set forth in claim 29, wherein the environment includes a device to be
worn on a body.
34. A method as set forth in claim 33, wherein the device is selected from the group
consisting of an article of jewelry, an article of clothing, shoes, eyeglasses, gloves, and hat.
35. A method as set forth in claim 29, wherein the environment includes a lightwand.
36. A method as set forth in claim 29, wherein the environment includes a toothbrush. 37 A method for illumination within an environment, the method comprising
providing at least one modular LED unit as set forth in claims 1 1 or 22,
placing the strip of LEDs within the environment, and
controlling the amount of electrical current supplied to at least one LED, so that a
particular amount of current supplied thereto generates a corresponding color within the
spectrum
38 A method as set forth in claim 37, wherein the environment includes a walkway and
wherein the step of placing includes positioning the strip of LEDs along one side of the
walkway as a directional indicator
39 A method as set forth in claim 37, wherein the environment includes a cove and
wherein the step of placing includes positioning the strip of LEDs provided adjacent the cove,
such that the strip of LEDs may illuminate the cove.
40 A method as set forth in claim 37, wherein the environment includes a handrail and
wherein the step of placing includes positioning the strip of LEDs on a surface of a handrail to
direct a user to the location of the handrail
41 A method as set forth in claim 37, wherein the environment includes a plurality of steps
on a stairway and wherein the step of placing includes positioning the strip of LEDs at an edge
of a step to inform a user of the location of the step
42 A method as set forth in claim 37, wherein the environment includes a toilet bowl and
wherein the step of placing includes positioning the strip of LEDs about a rim of the bowl or
the seat to inform a user of the location of the bowl or the seat
43. A method as set forth in claim 37, wherein the environment includes an elevated brake
light located in the rear of an automobile and wherein the step of placing includes positioning
the strip of LEDs within a previously provided housing for the brake light
44. A method as set forth in claim 37, wherein the environment includes a refrigerator door and wherein the step of placing includes positioning the strip of LEDs on a refrigerator
door handle.
45. A method as set forth in claim 37, wherein the environment includes a tree and wherein
the step of placing includes positioning the strip of LEDs on the tree so as to permit
illumination thereof.
46. A method as set forth in claim 37, wherein the environment includes a building and
wherein the step of placing includes positioning the strip of LEDs along a surface of the
building so that illumination of the LEDs may attract attention from an observer.
47. A method for illumination within an environment, the method comprising: providing at least one modular LED unit as set forth in claims 13 or 24;
placing the panel of LEDs within the environment; and
controlling the amount of electrical current supplied to at least one LED, so that a
particular amount of current supplied thereto generates a corresponding color within the
spectrum.
48. A method as set forth in claim 47, wherein the environment includes a floor and
wherein the step of placing includes positioning a geometrical panel of LEDs within at least
one designated area in the floor to provide illumination thereof.
49. A method as set forth in claim 47, wherein the environment includes an
illuminating surface and wherein the step of placing includes positioning a geometrical panel of
LEDs posterior to the surface to provide illumination of graphical illustration on the surface or
illumination of an object placed on the surface.
50. A method as set forth in claim 47, wherein the environment includes a
displayment sign and wherein the step of placing includes positioning a geometrical panel of LEDs within a housing located in front of the sign to provide illumination of illustration on the displayment sign
51 A method as set forth in claim 47, wherein the environment includes a traffic
light and wherein the step of placing includes positioning a geometrical panel of LEDs within a
housing for at least one of the plurality of lights
52 A method as set forth in claim 47, wherein the environment includes a
directional display sign and wherein the step of placing includes positioning a geometrical
panel of LEDs within a housing for the directional display sign
53 A method as set forth in claim 47, wherein the environment includes an
information board and wherein the step of placing includes positioning at least one geometrical
panel of LEDs on a front side of the board, so that informational data may be provided to the reader
54 A method as set forth in claim 53, wherein the information board is selected
from the group consisting of traffic information signs, silent radios, scoreboards, price boards,
electronic advertisement boards, and large public television screens
55 A method for illumination within an environment, the method compπsing
providing at least one modular LED unit as set forth in claims 15 or 26,
placing the three-dimensional structure of LEDs within the environment, and
controlling the amount of electπcal current supplied to at least one LED, so that a particular amount of current supplied thereto generates a corresponding color within the
spectrum
56 A method as set forth in claim 55, wherein the environment includes a toy
construction block and the step of placing includes positioning at least one three-dimensional
structure of LEDs on or within the toy construction block to permit illumination of such block
57. A method as set forth in claim 55, wherein the environment includes an
ornamental display and the step of placing includes forming at least one three-dimensional
structure of LEDs into a particular shape for display.
58. A method as set forth in claim 57, wherein the ornamental display is selected
from the group consisting of Christmas tree ornaments, animal-shaped figures, discotheque
balls and any natural or man-made object capable of being represented.
59. A method as set forth in claim 55, wherein the environment includes an
architectural glass block and the step of placing includes positioning at least one three-
dimensional structure of LEDs within the glass block for illumination thereof.
60. A method as set forth in claim 55, wherein the environment includes large
letters and the step of placing includes positioning at least one three-dimensional structure of LEDs on or within the letters for illumination thereof.
61. A method as set forth in claim 55, wherein the environment includes traditional
lighting devices and the step of placing includes positioning the three-dimensional structure of
LEDs within a socket for receiving a traditional lighting bulb.
62. A method as set forth in claim 55, wherein the environment includes warning
tower and the step of placing includes positioning the three-dimensional structure of LEDs on
the tower to act as a warning indicator to high flying planes or distantly located vessels.
63. A method as set forth in claim 55, wherein the environment includes a buoy and
the step of placing includes positioning the three-dimensional structure of LEDs within or on a
surface of the buoy for illumination thereof.
64. A method as set forth in claim 55, wherein the environment includes a ball or a
puck and the step of placing includes positioning the three-dimensional structure of LEDs
within the ball or puck to permit enhanced visualization of the ball or puck.
65. A method for illumination within an environment, the method comprising'
placing within the environment a combination of two or more of the modular LED unit
as set forth in claims 1 , 1 1, 13, 15, 22, 24 or 26; and
controlling the amount of electrical current supplied to at least one LED, so that a
particular amount of current supplied thereto generates a corresponding color within the
spectrum.
66. A method as set forth in claim 65, wherein the environment an ornamental
display and wherein the step of placing includes positioning at least one of a strip of LEDs, a
panel of LEDs and a three-dimensional structure of LEDs along a surface of the ornamental display.
67. A method as set forth in claim 66, wherein the ornamental display includes
Christmas tree ornaments, figurative animals, discotheque ball and any natural or man-made
object capable of being represented.
68. A method as set forth in claim 65, wherein the environment includes a bowling alley and wherein the step of placing includes positioning one of a strip of LEDs, a panel of
LEDs, and a three-dimensional structure of LEDs along a lane and one of a strip of LEDs, a panel of LEDs and a three-dimensional structure of LEDs on a ceiling, a floor or a wall of the
bowling alley.
69. A method as set forth in claim 65, wherein the environment includes a
theatrical setting and wherein the step of placing includes positioning one of a strip of LEDs, a
panel of LEDs, and a three-dimensional structure of LEDs on a ceiling, a floor or a wall of a
theater and one of the strip of LEDs, the panel of LEDs, and the three-dimensional structure
of LEDs on the remainder of the ceiling, the floor or the wall of the theater.
70. A method as set forth in claim 65, wherein the environment includes a swimming pool and wherein the step of placing includes positioning one of a strip of LEDs, a
panel of LEDs, and a three-dimensional structure of LEDs on a floor or a wall of the
swimming pool and one of the strip of LEDs, the panel of LEDs, and the three-dimensional
structure of LEDs on the other of the floor or the wall of the swimming pool.
71. A method as set forth in claim 65, wherein the environment includes a cargo
bay of a spacecraft and wherein the step of placing includes positioning one of a strip of LEDs,
a panel of LEDs, and a three-dimensional structure of LEDs on a floor, a ceiling or a wall of
the cargo bay and one of the strip of LEDs, the panel of LEDs, and the three-dimensional
structure of LEDs on the remainder of the floor, the ceiling or the wall of the cargo bay.
72. A method as set forth in claim 65, wherein the environment includes an aircraft hangar and wherein the step of placing includes positioning one of a strip of LEDs, a panel of
LEDs, and a three-dimensional structure of LEDs on a floor, a ceiling or a wall of the hangar
and one of the strip of LEDs, the panel of LEDs, and the three-dimensional structure of LEDs
on the remainder of the floor, the ceiling or the wall of the hangar.
73. A method as set forth in claim 65, wherein the environment includes a
warehouse and wherein the step of placing includes positioning one of a strip of LEDs, a panel
of LEDs, and a three-dimensional structure of LEDs on a floor, a ceiling or a wall of the
warehouse and one of the strip of LEDs, the panel of LEDs, and the three-dimensional
structure of LEDs on the remainder of floor, the ceiling or the wall of the warehouse.
74. A method as set forth in claim 65, wherein the environment includes a subway
station and wherein the step of placing includes positioning one of a strip of LEDs, a panel of
LEDs, and a three-dimensional structure of LEDs on a floor, a ceiling or a wall of the subway station and one of the strip of LEDs, the panel of LEDs, and the three-dimensional structure of LEDs on the remainder of the floor, the ceiling or the wall of the subway station.
75. A method as set forth in claim 65, wherein the environment includes marina
and wherein the step of placing includes positioning one of a strip of LEDs, a panel of LEDs,
and a three-dimensional structure of LEDs on a buoy, a dock, a light fixture or a boathouse
and one of the strip of LEDs, the panel of LEDs, and the three-dimensional structure of LEDs
on the remainder of the buoy, the dock, the light fixture or the boathouse.
76. A method as set forth in claim 65, wherein the environment includes a fireplace
and wherein the step of placing includes positioning one of a strip of LEDs, a panel of LEDs,
and a three-dimensional structure of LEDs on a simulated fire log, a wall or a floor of the
fireplace and one of the strip of LEDs, the panel of LEDs, and the three-dimensional structure
of LEDs on the remainder of the simulated fire log, a wall or a floor of the fireplace, such that
when colors within the spectrum are generated, an appearance of fire is simulated.
77. A method as set forth in claim 65, wherein the environment includes an
underside of a car and wherein the step of placing includes positioning one of a strip of LEDs,
a panel of LEDs, and a three-dimensional structure of LEDs on the underside of the car to
permit illumination of a road surface over which the car passes.
78. A light apparatus for indicating environmental conditions comprising
a) an illumination system;
b) a microcontroller for controlling the flow of current through the illumination
system and thereby dictating characteristics of the light emitted therefrom;
c) an analog to digital converter coupled to the microcontroller to change a
voltage signal to binary information; and
d) a transducer coupled to the converter to change a physical quantity to a voltage.
79. A light apparatus according to claim 78 wherein an illumination system includes at
least one LED.
80. A light apparatus according to claim 78 wherein transducer includes a temperature transducer.
81. A light apparatus according to claim 78 wherein transducer includes a force
transducer.
82. A light apparatus according to claim 78 wherein transducer includes a magnetic
field transducer.
83. A light apparatus according to claim 78 wherein transducer includes a particle detector.
84. A light apparatus according to claim 78 wherein the transducer includes a chemical
probe.
85. A light apparatus according to claim 78 wherein transducer includes an
electromagnetic radiation detector.
86. A light apparatus for indicating environmental conditions comprising
a) a power terminal; b) at least one light emitting diode (LED) coupled to the power terminal;
c) a current sink coupled to the at least one LED, the current sink having inputs
responsive to activation signals;
d) a controller coupled to the inputs, said controller having an alterable address, a
timer for generating the activation signals for a predefined portion of timing
cycles, and a receiver for receiving data corresponding to the alterable address
and indicative of the predefined portion of the timing cycles; e) an analog to digital converter coupled to the controller to change a voltage
signal to binary information,
f) a transducer coupled to the converter to change a physical quantity to a
voltage.
87. A light apparatus according to claim 86 wherein transducer includes a temperature
transducer.
88. A light apparatus according to claim 87 wherein the temperature transducer
includes at least one of: thermocouple, thermistor, and integrated circuit
temperature sensor.
89. A light apparatus according to claim 87 wherein the apparatus is a color
thermometer that associates an ambient temperature with a range of colors.
90. A light apparatus according to claim 86 wherein transducer includes a force transducer.
91. A light apparatus according to claim 90 wherein force transducer includes at least
one of: differential transformer, strain gauge, and piezoelectric device.
92. A light apparatus according to claim 90 wherein the apparatus is a color
speedometer that associates an angular velocity of a wheel with a range of colors.
93. A light apparatus according to claim 90 wherein the apparatus is a color
inclinometer that associates an angle with a range of colors.
94. A light apparatus according to claim 86 wherein transducer includes a magnetic
field transducer.
95. A light apparatus according to claim 94 wherein magnetic field transducer
includes one of: Hall-effect probe, flip coil, and nuclear magnetic resonance
magnometer.
96. A light apparatus according to claim 86 wherein transducer includes a particle detector.
97. A light apparatus according to claim 96 wherein particle detector includes at least
one of: ionization chamber, Geiger counter, scintillator, solid-state detector,
surface-barrier detector, Cerenkov detector, and drift chamber.
98. A color smoke alert system that emits light of various colors in response to a
presence of sufficient smoke particles comprising
a) a smoke detector;
b) a light apparatus according to claim 96 electrically coupled to the smoke detector.
99. A light apparatus according to claim 86 wherein the transducer includes a chemical probe.
100. A light apparatus according to claim 99 wherein the chemical probe includes an
ion-specific electrode. 101. A light apparatus according to claim 99 wherein the apparatus is an electronic
color pH meter for indicating the acidity of solutions by displaying colored lights.
102. A light apparatus according to claim 86 wherein transducer includes an
electromagnetic radiation detector.
103. A light apparatus according to claim 102 wherein the electromagnetic radiation
detector includes at least one of: photodiode, phototransistor, photomultiplier,
channel-plate intensifier, charge-coupled devices, and intensified silicon
intensifier target (ISIT).
104. A security system to indicate the presence of an object comprising:
a) an identification badge; b) a light apparatus according to claim 102 residing on the badge; and c) a transmitter and receiver of electromagnetic radiation disposed on said badge;
d) a security clearance network that receives and transmits electromagnetic signals
to the badge.
105. A security system according to claim 104 wherein the system provides information
about a person's position and clearance level.
106. A light buffer to maintain substantially constant lighting conditions in a room
comprising
a) the light apparatus of claim 102;
b) a feedback mechanism coupled to the light apparatus wherein the lighting
conditions are monitored to maintain a preselected lighting condition.
107. A telephone color indicator comprising:
a) a power terminal; b) an illumination system coupled to the power terminal;
c) a current sink coupled to the illumination system, the current sink having
inputs responsive to activation signals;
d) a controller coupled to the inputs, said controller having an alterable address, a
timer for generating the activation signals for a predefined portion of timing
cycles, and a receiver for receiving data corresponding to the alterable address and
indicative of the predefined portion of the timing cycles;
e) an analog to digital converter coupled to the controller to change a voltage
signal to binary information;
108. A method for indicating environmental conditions comprising: a) providing an illumination system; b) controlling the flow of current through the illumination system by using a
microcontroller to dictate characteristics of light emitted therefrom;
c) converting analog information to digital information by using an A/D converter
coupled to the microcontroller; and
d) changing a physical quantity to an electrical signal by using a transducer
coupled to the converter.
109. A method as in claim 108 wherein transducer includes one of: a temperature
transducer, a force transducer, a magnetic field transducer, a particle detector, a
chemical probe, and an electromagnetic radiation detector.
110. A method for attracting attention from an observer, the method comprising the acts of:
providing an LED system to generate light of a range of colors within a spectrum;
placing the LED system to affect an object with the light; and
generating the light so as to illuminate the object.
111. The method of claim 110, wherein the act of generating includes providing a processor
for controlling an amount of electrical current supplied to the LED system, so that a particular
amount of current supplied thereto generates light of a corresponding color within the
spectrum.
112. The method of claim 11 1, wherein the act of placing includes positioning the LED
system to affect an aquarium.
113. The method of claim 11 1, wherein the act of placing includes positioning the LED
system to affect an exhibit.
1 14. The method of claim 1 1 1, wherein the act of placing includes positioning the LED
system to affect a diorama.
1 15. The method of claim 1 1 1, wherein the act of placing includes positioning the LED
system to affect a display case.
116. The method of claim 1 1 1, wherein the act of placing includes positioning the LED
system to affect an object which is edible.
117. The method of claim 1 1 1, wherein the act of placing includes positioning the LED
system to affect a non-opaque object.
118. The method of claim 1 17, wherein the non-opaque object is substantially transparent
and comprises glass, ice, crystal, or plastic.
119. The method of claim 117, wherein the act of placing includes positioning the LED
system to affect a non-opaque container containing a non-opaque substance.
120. The method of claim 1 19, wherein the container and the substance are substantially
transparent. 121. The method of claim 1 19, wherein the container is a beverage container and the
substance is a beverage.
122. The method of claim 1 19, wherein positioning includes disposing the LED system on a
coaster holding the object.
123. The method of claim 111, wherein the act of placing includes positioning the LED
system to affect a displayment sign.
124. The method of claim 11 1, wherein the act of placing includes positioning the LED
system to affect an informational board. 125 The method of claim 124, wherein the informational board is selected from the group
consisting of traffic information signs, silent radios, scoreboards, price boards, and
advertisement boards
126 The method of claim 1 1 1, wherein the generated light changes color over time
127 The method of claim 1 1 1, wherein the generated light maintains a constant color
128 The method of claim 1 1 1, wherein the generated light changes color over a period of
time so as to permit an observer to perceive a change in color of the object being affected by
the generated light
129 The method of claim 1 1 1, wherein the generated light changes color over a period of
time so as to permit an observer to perceive an illusion of motion in a design on the object
being affected by the generated light
130 The method of claim 128 or 129, wherein the object is at least one of a picture, photograph, image, displayment sign, informational board, or advertisement display
131 The method of claim 1 1 1, wherein the generated light changes color over a period of
time so as to permit an observer to perceive an illusion of motion of the object being affected
by the generated light
132 The method of claim 128, 129, or 131, wherein the object being affected by the light
comprises at least one display used for advertising purposes
133 The method of claim 128, 129, or 131, wherein the generated light changes color over
a period of time in a pre-programmed sequence
134 The method of claim 128, 129, or 131, wherein the generated light changes color over
a peπod of time in response to external conditions
135 The method of claim 134, wherein the external conditions are at least one of proximity
of people, ambient light, time of day, and location 136 A method for attracting attention from an observer, the method compπsing the acts of providing an LED system to generate light of a range of colors within a spectrum,
placing an object between the LED system and a surface, and
generating light so as to project light through the object onto a surface
137 The method of claim 136, wherein the act of generating includes providing a processor
for controlling an amount of electπcal current supplied to the LED system, so that a particular
amount of current supplied thereto generates light of a corresponding color within the
spectrum
138 The method of claim 137, wherein the act of placing includes positioning at least one
of a stencil and a gobo between the LED system and the surface
139 The method of claim 137, wherein the act of placing includes positioning a pattern
between the LED system and the surface
140 The method of claim 137, wherein the act of placing includes positioning a slide
between the LED system and the surface 141 The method of claim 137, wherein the act of placing includes positioning an LCD
display between the LED system and the surface
142 The method of claim 137, wherein the act of placing includes positioning an object
between the LED system and at least one of a floor, sidewalk, wall, or ceiling
143 The method of claim 137, wherein the act of placing includes positioning an object
between the LED system and a surface which is not flat
144 The method of claim 137, wherein the act of placing includes positioning an object
between the LED system and a cloud
145. The method of claim 137, further comprising the act of passing the light through a lens.
146. The method of claim 137, wherein the act of placing includes positioning an object
between the LED system and at least one of a screen or fabric surface.
147. The method of claim 137, wherein the generated light changes color over time.
148. The method of claim 137, wherein the generated light maintains a constant color.
149. The method of claim 137, wherein the act of placing includes positioning a
micromirror device between the LED system and the surface.
150. A method for illuminating a container, comprising
a power terminal; an LED system coupled to the power terminal; a current sink coupled to each LED, the current sink having inputs responsive to
activation signals;
an addressable controller having an alterable address, the controller coupled to the
inputs and having a signal generator to generate the activation signals for a predefined portion
of timing cycles;
a receiver coupled to the addressable controller to receive data corresponding to the
alterable address and indicative of the predefined portion of the timing cycles; and
a non-opaque container containing a non-opaque substance illuminated by the light
generated by the LED system.
151. A method for illuminating a vending machine, comprising
a power terminal; an LED system coupled to the power terminal; a current sink coupled to each LED, the current sink having inputs responsive to
activation signals; an addressable controller having an alterable address, the controller coupled to the
inputs and having a signal generator to generate the activation signals for a predefined portion
of timing cycles;
a receiver coupled to the addressable controller to receive data corresponding to the
alterable address and indicative of the predefined portion of the timing cycles; and
a vending machine illuminated by the light generated by the LED system.
152. A retail display comprising more than one color, which retail display is designed to permit an observer to perceive an illusion of motion when the color of the light illuminating
the display is varied.
153. A retail display comprising more than one color, which retail display is designed to
permit an observer to perceive a change of color in the display when the color of the light
illuminating the display is varied. 154. An article of clothing comprising an LED system controlled by a microprocessor.
155. The article of clothing of claim 154, further comprising a sensor.
156. The article of clothing of claim 155, wherein the article of clothing is capable of
recording data and replaying the recorded data.
157. The article of clothing of claim 154, further comprising a receiver for data transmitted
from an external transmitter.
158. The article of clothing of claim 154, wherein the LED system is capable of displaying a
video image.
159. The article of clothing of claim 154, wherein the LED system is capable of displaying a
programmable image.
160. A system for illuminating a material, comprising an LED system for generating a range of colors within a spectrum,
a processor for controlling the amount of electrical current supplied to the LED
system, so that a particular amount of current supplied thereto generates a corresponding
color within the spectrum, and
a positioning system capable of positioning the LED system in a spatial relationship
with the material whereby the LED system illuminates the material.
161. A system according to claim 160, wherein the processor is responsive to a signal relating
to a feature of the material.
162. A system according to claim 160, wherein the positioning system is capable of being directed by a part of an operator's body.
163. A system according to claim 160, wherein the positioning system comprises a remote
control system.
164. A system according to claim 160, comprising a robotic vision system.
165. A method for illuminating a material, comprising
providing an LED system for generating a range of colors within a spectrum,
providing a processor for controlling the amount of electrical current supplied to
the LED system, so that a particular amount of current supplied thereto generates a light
of a corresponding color within the spectrum,
positioning the LED system in a spatial relationship with the material whereby the LED
system illuminates the material, and
producing the light from the LED system.
166. A method according to claim 165, comprising providing an image capture system, wherein the image capture system is adapted for
recording an image of the material.
167. A method according to claim 165, comprising
determining the range of colors within the spectrum for illuminating the material, and
controlling the LED system to generate the corresponding color within the spectrum.
168. A method according to claim 165, wherein the material comprises a biological entity.
169. A method according to claim 168, wherein the biological entity comprises a living
organism.
170. A method according to claim 165, comprising
selecting an illumination condition to be produced in the material,
illuminating the material with a range of colors produced by the LED system, and
selecting from the range of colors produced by the LED system a set of colors,
whereby the set of colors produces in the material said illumination condition.
171. A method according to claim 170, comprising
illuminating the material with said set of colors.
172. A method for evaluating a material, comprising
selecting an area of the material for evaluation,
illuminating the area of the material with an LED system,
determining at least one characteristic of a light reflected from the area,
wherein the characteristic is selected from the group including color and intensity, and
comparing the characteristic of the light reflected from the area with a set of
known light parameters, whereby the set of known light parameters relates to a feature of
said material.
173. A method according to claim 172, wherein the set of known light parameters relates to
an abnormal feature of the material.
174. A method according to claim 172, wherein the material comprises a biological entity.
175. A system for illuminating a body part, comprising
a power source;
an LED system connected to the power source, said LED system adapted for illuminating
the body organ,
a medical instrument adapted for positioning the LED system in proximity to the body part
whereby the LED system illuminates the body part; and
a microprocessor for controlling the LED system.
176. A system according to claim 175, wherein the microprocessor is responsive to a signal
relating to a feature of the body part.
177. A system according to claim 176, wherein the feature of the body part is a structural
condition.
178. A system according to claim 175, wherein the body part is illuminated in vivo.
179. A system according to claim 175, wherein the body part comprises a lumen.
180. A system according to claim 175, wherein the medical instrument is adapted for insertion
within a body cavity.
181. A method for diagnosing a condition of a body part, comprising
selecting an area of the body part for evaluation,
illuminating the area of the body part with an LED system,
determining at least one characteristic of a light reflected from the area, wherein the
characteristic is selected from the group including color and intensity, and comparing the characteπstic of the light reflected from the area with a set of known
light parameters, wherein the set of known light parameters relates to the condition of the
body part
182 A method according to claim 181, wherein the set of known light parameters relates to a
pathological condition of the body part
183 A method according to claim 181, comprising the additional step of administering an
agent to a patient,
wherein the agent is delivered to the body part, and
whereby the agent alters the characteπstic of the light reflected from the area of the body part
184 A method for effecting a change in a mateπal, comprising providing an LED system for generating a range of colors within a spectrum,
selecting from the range of colors a set of colors, whereby the set of colors produces in the
material the change, and illuminating the material with the LED system for a period of time predetermined to be
effective in producing the change
185 A method according to claim 184, wherein the material comprises a biological entity
186 A method according to claim 185, wherein the biological entity comprises a living
organism
187 A method according to claim 186, wherein the living organism is a vertebrate
188 The method of claim 186, compπsing illuminating an environment surrounding the living
organism
189 A method for treating a condition of a patient, compπsing
providing an LED system for generating a range of colors within a spectrum, selecting from the range of colors a set of colors, whereby the set of colors produces in the
patient a therapeutic effect, and illuminating an area of the patient with the set of colors for a period of time predetermined to
be effective in producing the therapeutic effect. 190. A method according to claim 189, wherein the area of the patient comprises an external
surface of the patient.
191. A method according to claim 189, wherein the area of the patient comprises a body part.
192. A method according to claim 189, comprising the additional step of administering an
agent to a patient, wherein the agent is delivered to the area of the patient, and
whereby the agent alters the therapeutic effect achieved by illuminating the area of the
patient with the set of colors.
193. An illumination system, comprising
a power terminal,
an LED system, a current sink coupled to the LED system, the current sink comprising an input
responsive to an activation signal that enables flow of current through the current sink,
an addressable controller having an alterable address, the controller coupled to the
input and having a timer for generating the activation signal for a predefined portion of a
timing cycle,
the addressable controller further comprising a data receiver corresponding to the
alterable address and indicative of the predefined portion of the timing cycle, and
a positioning system capable of positioning the LED system in a spatial relationship
with a material whereby the LED system illuminates the material.
194. A signal processing system for illumination signals, comprising:
a decoder for decoding a combined signal; and
a connection for delivering a portion of the combined signal to an illumination source,
which source is capable of generating an illumination condition from the portion of the
combined signal.
195. A signal processing system of claim 194, further comprising:
an encoder for encoding the combined signal from and illumination control signal and a
second signal.
196. A signal processing system of claim 195, wherein the encoder includes a multiplexor.
197. A signal processing system of claim 195, wherein the encoder includes a sync detector.
198. A signal processing system of claim 195, wherein the encoder includes a timing and
control circuit.
199. A signal processing system of claim 194, wherein the combined signal includes at least
one of a video signal, a radio frequency signal, an electrical signal, an infrared signal, an
acoustic signal, and audio signal, and an optical signal.
200. A signal processing system of claim 194, wherein the combined signal includes an
entertainment signal.
201. A signal processing system of claim 194, wherein the combined signal includes an
information signal.
202. A signal processing system of claim 194, wherein the combined signal includes an
educational signal.
203. A signal processing system of claim 195, further comprising:
a connection for delivering the combined signal from the encoder to the decoder.
204. A signal processing system of claim 203, wherein the connection includes a broadcast
transmission.
205. A signal processing system of claim 203, wherein the connection includes an electrical
circuit.
206. A signal processing system of claim 203, wherein the connection includes a data track.
207. A signal processing system of claim 203, wherein the connection includes a data bus.
208. A signal processing system of claim 203, wherein the connection includes a radio
frequency transmitter and receiver.
209. A signal processing system of claim 203, wherein the connection includes an infrared transmitter and receiver.
210. A signal processing system of claim 203, wherein the connection includes a network.
21 1. A signal processing system of claim 203, wherein the connection includes a cable.
212. A signal processing system of claim 194, further comprising a
device other than the illumination source, and a connection for delivering a portion of the combined signal to the other device.
213. A signal processing system of claim 212, wherein the other device is an entertainment
device.
214. A signal processing system of claim 212, wherein the other device is at least one of a
television, a computer, a compact disc player, a stereo, a radio, dolby digital player, a video
cassette player, a DVD player, a toy, a CD-ROM drive, a film projector, a surround sound
system, a dolby sound system, a THX sound system, and a tape player.
215. A signal processing system of claim 212, wherein the connector is at least one of a
circuit, a network, a data bus, a cable, a wire, a radio frequency transmitter and receiver, an
infrared transmitter and receiver, a broadcast transmitter and receiver, an optical transmitter and receiver, an acoustic transmitter and receiver, a microwave transmitter and receiver, and a
circuit.
216. A signal processing system of claim 212, further comprising:
a splitter for separating the portion from the combined signal.
217. A signal processing system of claim 194, wherein the decoder includes at least one of a
sync detector, a timing and control circuit, and a shift register.
218. A signal processing system of claim 195, further comprising a
a signal generator for generating the second signal; and
an illumination control driver for generating the illumination control signal for the
illumination source.
219. A signal processing system of claim 218, wherein the illumination source includes an
LED system that is controlled by a microprocessor to vary at least one of the color and
intensity of the illumination produced by the illumination source in response to the illumination
control signal.
220. A method of signal processing for illumination signals, comprising:
decoding an illumination control signal from a combined signal; and
delivering the illumination control signal to an illumination source that is capable of
generating an illumination condition from the illumination control signal.
221. A method of signal processing of claim 220, further comprising:
encoding the illumination control signal portion with a second signal to provide the
combined signal.
222. A method of signal processing of claim 221 , wherein the encoder includes a
multiplexor.
223. A method of signal processing of claim 221, wherein the encoder includes a sync detector.
224. A method of signal processing of claim 221, wherein the encoder includes a timing and
control circuit.
225. A method of signal processing of claim 220, wherein the combined signal includes at
least one of a video signal, a radio frequency signal, an electrical signal, an infrared signal, an
acoustic signal, and audio signal, and an optical signal.
226. A method of signal processing of claim 220, wherein the combined signal includes an
entertainment signal.
227. A method of signal processing of claim 220, wherein the combined signal includes an information signal.
228. A method of signal processing of claim 220, wherein the combined signal includes an educational signal.
229. A method of signal processing of claim 221, further comprising:
delivering encoded signal to the decoder.
230. A method of signal processing of claim 229, wherein the act of delivering the encoded
signal includes at least one of a broadcast transmission, a video transmission, an electrical
circuit transmission, a data transmission, a packet transmission, a data bus transmission, a
radio transmission, an infrared transmission, an acoustic transmission, an optical transmission,
a network transmission, a cable transmission and a microwave transmission.
231. A method of signal processing of claim 220, further comprising:
providing a device other than the illumination source, and
delivering a portion of the combined signal to the device.
232. A method of signal processing of claim 231, wherein the other device is an
entertainment device.
233. A method of signal processing of claim 231, wherein the device is at least one of a
television, a computer, a compact disc player, a stereo, a radio, a dolby digital player, a video
cassette player, a DVD player, a pager, a security badge, a CD-ROM drive, a film projector, a
surround sound system, a dolby sound system, a THX sound system, and a tape player.
234. A method of signal processing of claim 231, wherein the act of delivering the signal to
the other device includes providing at least one of a circuit, a network, a data bus, a cable, a
wire, a radio frequency transmitter and receiver, an infrared transmitter and receiver, a
broadcast transmitter and receiver, an optical transmitter and receiver, an acoustic transmitter
and receiver, a microwave transmitter and receiver, and a circuit. 235. A method of signal processing of claim 231, further comprising :
separating the second signal from the illumination control signal.
236. A method of signal processing of claim 220, wherein the act of decoding includes
providing at least one of a sync detector, a timing and control circuit, and a shift register.
237. A method of signal processing of claim 221 , further comprising
providing a signal generator for generating the second signal; and
providing an illumination control driver for generating the illumination control signal
for the illumination source.
238. A method of signal processing of claim 220, wherein the act of providing the
illumination source includes providing an LED system that is controlled by a microprocessor
to vary at least one of the color and intensity of the illumination produced by the illumination
source in response to the illumination control signal.
239. An entertainment system, comprising: an illumination source, the illumination source including an LED system that is controlled by a microprocessor to vary at least one of the color and intensity of the
illumination produced by the illumination source in response to a control signal;
a receiver of the illumination source for receiving a control signal;
an entertainment signal generator for generating an entertainment signal, wherein the
entertainment signal is at least one of a video signal, an audio signal, and a data packet;
an entertainment device for producing entertainment using the entertainment signal,
wherein the entertainment device is at least one of a television, a computer, a compact disc
player, a stereo, a radio, a video cassette player, a DVD player, a CD-ROM drive, a film
projector, a surround sound system, a dolby sound system, a THX sound system, and a tape player;
an illumination control driver for generating the control signal for the illumination
source;
an encoder for encoding the control signal with the entertainment signal;
a connection for delivering the encoded signal to the location of at least one of the
illumination source and the entertainment device;
a decoder for decoding the control signal from the encoded signal;
a connection for delivering the entertainment signal to the entertainment device; and
a connection for delivering the control signal to the receiver of the illumination source.
240. An encoder for a signal processing system for illumination signals, comprising:
an input for receiving an illumination control signal;
an input for receiving a second signal; and
a timing and control circuit for combining the illumination control signal with the
second signal.
241. An encoder of claim 240, further comprising: a sync detector for initiating the timing and control circuit.
242. An encoder of claim 240, further comprising:
a multiplexor for combining the illumination control signal with the second signal.
243. A method for powering a device, comprising:
providing a data signal; and
extracting power from the data signal to power the device.
244. A method of claim 243, wherein the device is a device that responds to the data signal.
245. A method of claim 243, wherein the data signal varies between at least two states.
246. A method of claim 245, wherein the two states represent digital data states.
247. A method of claim 243, wherein the data signal is a signal for an RS-485 compliant
device.
248. A method of claim 243, wherein the data signal is a DMX-512 protocol signal.
249. A method of claim 243, wherein the device is an RS-485 compliant device.
250. A method of claim 243, wherein the device includes a processor for control of the
device based on the data signal.
251. A method of claim 243, wherein the device is a light module.
252. A method of claim 251 , wherein the light module includes a processor and an LED
system that are responsive to the data signal.
253. A system for powering a device, comprising:
a signal generator; and
an extractor for extracting power from the signal to power the device.
254. A system of claim 253. wherein the device is a device that responds to the data
signal.
255. A system of claim 253, wherein the data signal varies between at least two states.
256. A system of claim 255, wherein the two states represent digital data states.
257. A system of claim 253. wherein the data signal is a signal for an RS-485 compliant
device.
258. A system of claim 253, wherein the data signal is a DMX-512 protocol signal.
259. A system of claim 253, wherein the device is an RS-485 compliant device.
260. A system of claim 253, wherein the device includes a processor for control of the
device based on the data signal.
261. A system of claim 253, wherein the device is a light module.
262. A system of claim 261 , wherein the light module includes a processor and an LED
system that are responsive to the data signal.
263. A method for control of a device that is capable of responding to digital data,
comprising:
providing an electronic device, wherein the device is an RS-485 compliant device
and includes a processor for control of the device based on a data signal;
providing a data signal for control of the device, the data signal varying between at
least two states representing digital data states; and
providing a power/data multiplexor, for powering the device with power from the
data signal.
264. A light bulb, comprising:
a housing, an illumination source, disposed in the housing, and
a processor, disposed in the housing, for controlling the illumination source.
265. The light bulb of claim 264, wherein the housing is configured to fit a conventional
light fixture.
266. The light bulb of claim 264, wherein the illumination source is an LED system.
267. The light bulb of claim 264, wherein the processor controls the intensity of the
illumination source.
268. The light bulb of claim 264, wherein the processor controls the color of the
illumination source.
269. The light bulb of claim 264, further comprising:
a receiver, for receiving a signal.
270. The light bulb of claim 269, wherein the signal is selected from the group consisting
of infrared, optical, electrical, radio, and acoustic signals and wherein the processor is
responsive to the signal.
271. The light bulb of claim 264, further comprising:
a transmitter, for transmitting a signal.
272. The light bulb of claim 271 , wherein the signal is selected from the group consisting
of infrared, optical, electrical, radio, and acoustic signals.
273. The light bulb of claim 271 , wherein the signal provides an interface to a device
external to the light bulb.
274. The light bulb of claim 273, wherein the external device is another light bulb.
275. The light bulb of claim 273, wherein the external device is a device for directing the
illumination source.
276. The light bulb of claim 273. wherein the external device is at least one of a motor, a television, a security system, a video cassette recorder, remote control, handheld personal
computer, a video cassette player, a disc player, a receiver, a stereo, a turntable, a personal
computer, a microprocessor, a network, a pager, a security badge, a web television, an
alarm system, a server, a phone, a disc drive, a laptop computer, a microwave, an oven, an
alarm, a clock, a radio, a tape player, and a tape recorder.
277. The light bulb of claim 273, further comprising:
memory, disposed in the housing.
278. The light bulb of claim 277, wherein the memory stores a program for controlling
the illumination source.
279. The light bulb of claim 277, wherein the memory stores a program for interface to a
device external to the light bulb.
280. The light bulb of claim 279, wherein the external device is at least one of a motor, a
television, a security system, a video cassette recorder, a video cassette player, a disc player, a remote control, a handheld personal computer, a receiver, a stereo, a turntable, a
personal computer, a microprocessor, a web television, an alarm system, a server, a phone,
a disc drive, a laptop computer, a microwave, an oven, an alarm, a clock, a radio, a tape
player, and a tape recorder.
281. A light bulb, comprising:
a housing, wherein the housing is configured to fit into a conventional light fixture,
.an illumination source, disposed in the housing, wherein the illumination source is a
light emitting diode, a processor, disposed in the housing, wherein the processor controls at least one of
the intensity and the color of the illumination source, and
memory, disposed in the housing, wherein the memory stores at least one of a
program for controlling the illumination source and a program for interface to an external
device.
282. The light bulb of claim 281 , further comprising:
a receiver, for receiving a first signal, and
a transmitter, for transmitting a second signal, wherein each of the first signal and
the second signal is selected from the group consisting of infrared, optical, electrical, radio,
and acoustic signals and wherein the processor at least one of controls or is responsive to
the signal.
283. The light bulb of claim 282, wherein at least one of the first signal and the second
signal is an interface to the external device and the external device is selected from the
group consisting of a light bulb, a light fixture, a pager, a security badge, a motor, a
remote control, a handheld personal computer, a television, a security system, a video
cassette recorder, a video cassette player, a disc player, a receiver, a stereo, a turntable, a
personal computer, a microprocessor, a network, a web television, an alarm system, a
server, a phone, a disc drive, a laptop computer, a network computer, a microwave, an
oven, an alarm, a clock, a radio, a tape player, and a tape recorder.
284. A method of providing a light bulb, comprising:
providing a housing,
configuring the housing to fit a conventional light fixture,
disposing an illumination source in the housing, disposing a processor in the housing for controlling at least one of the intensity and
the color of the illumination source, and
providing memory in the housing for controlling the illumination source and a
program for interface to an external device.
285. The method of claim 284, further comprising:
providing a receiver, for receiving a first signal, and
providing a transmitter, for transmitting a second signal, wherein each of the first
signal and the second signal is selected from the group consisting of infrared, optical,
electrical, radio, and acoustic signals and wherein the processor at least one of controls or
is responsive to the signal.
286. The method of claim 285, wherein at least one of the first signal and the second
signal is an interface to the external device and the external device is selected from the
group consisting of a light bulb, a light fixture, a pager, a security badge, a motor, a
remote control, a handheld personal computer, a television, a security system, a video
cassette recorder, a video cassette player, a disc player, a receiver, a stereo, a turntable, a
personal computer, a microprocessor, a network, a web television, an alarm system, a
server, a phone, a disc drive, a laptop computer, a network computer, a microwave, an
oven, an alarm, a clock, a radio, a tape player, and a tape recorder.
287. A system for delivering data, comprising:
a track having a plurality of conducting wires; and
a driver for delivering slewed data to the track.
288. A system of claim 287, further comprising:
a housing; and a plurality of devices disposed on the housing and connected to the track
289 A system of claim 288, wherein the devices are compatible with the RS-485 standard
290 A system of claim 288, wherein the devices are illumination devices
291 A system of claim 288, wherein the devices include an LED system
292 A system of claim 291, wherein the LED system is controlled by a processor
293 A system of claim 287, wherein the driver is capable of controlling a transition signal
between a state representing a logical one and a state representing a logical zero
294 A system of claim 287, further comprising a terminator for the track for absorbing
excess energy in the track
295 A system of claim 294, wherein the terminator includes a bridge rectifier
296 A system of claim 294, wherein the terminator includes a shunt regulator
297 A system of claim 287, further comprising a track head which electrically attaches to
both power and signal conductors of the track
298 A method of delivering data, comprising
providing a track having a plurality of conducting wires, and
providing a driver for delivering slewed data to the track
299 A method of claim 298, further comprising
providing a housing,
disposing a plurality of devices on the housing, and
connecting the devices to the track
300 A method of claim 299, wherein the devices are compatible with the RS-485 standard
301 A method of claim 299, wherein the devices are illumination devices
302 A method of claim 299, wherein the devices include an LED system
303 A method of claim 302, further comprising controlling the LED system with a microprocessor.
304. A method of claim 299, further comprising:
using the driver to control a transition signal between a state representing a logical one
and a state representing a logical zero.
305. A method of claim 299, further comprising:
providing a terminator for the track for absorbing excess energy in the track.
306. A method of claim 305, wherein the terminator includes a bridge rectifier.
307. A method of claim 305, wherein the terminator includes a shunt regulator.
308. A method of claim 299, further comprising:
providing a track head which electrically attaches to both power and signal conductors
of the track.
309. A system for delivering data, comprising:
a track having a plurality of conducting wires;
a housing for the track; a driver, for delivering data to the track, the driver capable of controlling a transition
signal between a state representing a logical one and a state representing a logical zero; and
a plurality of devices disposed on the housing and connected to the track, the devices
being compatible with the RS-485 standard, wherein the devices include an LED system
designed to be controlled by a microprocessor.
310. A system of claim 309, further comprising:
a terminator for the track for absorbing excess energy in the track.
311. A system of claim 310, wherein the terminator includes at least one of a bridge rectifier
and a shunt regulator.
312. A system of claim 309, further comprising: a track head which electπcally attaches to both power and signal conductors of a track
313 A method for illumination within an environment, the method comprising
providing a modular LED system,
placing the LED system within the environment, and
controlling the amount of electπcal current supplied to at least one LED, so that a
particular amount of current supplied thereto generates a corresponding color within the
spectrum
314 A method as set forth in claim 313, wherein the environment includes a ceiling and
wherein the step of placing includes positioning a geometrical panel of LEDs within at least
one designated area on the ceiling to provide illumination thereof
315 A method as set forth in claim 313, wherein the environment includes a vending machine and wherein the step of placing includes positioning a geometric panel of LEDs
posterior to a frontal display of the vending machine to provide illumination of illustration on
the frontal display 316 A method as set forth in claim 313, wherein the environment includes a fishing lure and
the step of placing includes position an LED system on the fishing lure
317 A light module, compπsing
an LED system,
a processor,
a housing, and
a heat spreader plate, wherein the housing is a heat dissipating housing and wherein the
LED system is thermally connected to the heat spreader plate
318 A light module of claim 317, wherein the thermal connection includes a thermally
conductive polymer
PCT/US1998/026853 1997-08-26 1998-12-17 Digitally controlled illumination methods and systems WO1999031560A2 (en)

Priority Applications (6)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
AU19241/99A AU1924199A (en) 1997-12-17 1998-12-17 Digitally controlled illumination methods and systems
ES98964035.4T ES2666995T3 (en) 1997-12-17 1998-12-17 Digitally controlled lighting methods and systems
JP2000539392A JP4718008B2 (en) 1997-12-17 1998-12-17 Digitally controlled lighting method and system
CA002314163A CA2314163C (en) 1997-12-17 1998-12-17 Digitally controlled illumination methods and systems
EP98964035.4A EP1040398B1 (en) 1997-12-17 1998-12-17 Digitally controlled illumination methods and systems
US10/163,164 US7231060B2 (en) 1997-08-26 2002-06-05 Systems and methods of generating control signals

Applications Claiming Priority (12)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US7128197P 1997-12-17 1997-12-17
US60/071,281 1997-12-17
US6879297P 1997-12-24 1997-12-24
US60/068,792 1997-12-24
US7886198P 1998-03-20 1998-03-20
US60/078,861 1998-03-20
US7928598P 1998-03-25 1998-03-25
US60/079,285 1998-03-25
US9092098P 1998-06-26 1998-06-26
US60/090,920 1998-06-26
USPCT/US98/17702 1998-08-26
PCT/US1998/017702 WO1999010867A1 (en) 1997-08-26 1998-08-26 Multicolored led lighting method and apparatus

Publications (3)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO1999031560A2 true WO1999031560A2 (en) 1999-06-24
WO1999031560A3 WO1999031560A3 (en) 1999-09-02
WO1999031560A8 WO1999031560A8 (en) 1999-10-07

Family

ID=27535807

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/US1998/026853 WO1999031560A2 (en) 1997-08-26 1998-12-17 Digitally controlled illumination methods and systems

Country Status (4)

Country Link
EP (1) EP1040398B1 (en)
AU (1) AU1924199A (en)
ES (1) ES2666995T3 (en)
WO (1) WO1999031560A2 (en)

Cited By (66)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2001003103A1 (en) * 1999-07-06 2001-01-11 Denton Douglas Wilmot An activity monitoring device
WO2001005195A1 (en) * 1999-07-14 2001-01-18 Color Kinetics Incorporated Systems and methods for authoring lighting sequences
EP1113709A2 (en) * 1999-12-28 2001-07-04 Avix Inc. Light control for led lighting equipment
JP2001307505A (en) * 2000-04-19 2001-11-02 Matsushita Electric Ind Co Ltd Tube bulb and lighting equipment
EP1152642A2 (en) * 2000-04-27 2001-11-07 Agilent Technologies, Inc. (a Delaware corporation) Method and apparatus for measuring spectral content of LED light source and control thereof
WO2002011553A2 (en) * 2000-08-04 2002-02-14 Pearl Technology Holdings, Llc Fiber optic candy
EP1113215A3 (en) * 1999-12-29 2002-10-09 Spx Corporation Multi-colored industrial signal device
EP1258174A1 (en) * 1999-11-30 2002-11-20 Polaris Pool Systems, Inc. A multicolor led lamp bulb for underwater pool lights
JP2003531467A (en) * 2000-04-24 2003-10-21 カラー・キネティックス・インコーポレーテッド Light emitting diode based products
US6683423B2 (en) 2002-04-08 2004-01-27 David W. Cunningham Lighting apparatus for producing a beam of light having a controlled luminous flux spectrum
WO2004034748A1 (en) * 2002-10-03 2004-04-22 Gelcore Llc Led-based modular lamp
US6902299B2 (en) 2003-02-27 2005-06-07 Cantronic Systems Inc. Long distance illuminator
US6909377B2 (en) 2000-06-27 2005-06-21 Arnold & Richter Cine Technik Gmbh & Co. Betriebs Kg Illumination device with light emitting diodes (LEDs), method of illumination and method for image recording with such an LED illumination device
US6933680B2 (en) 2002-05-10 2005-08-23 Frank Joseph Oskorep Decorative lights with at least one commonly controlled set of color-controllable multi-color LEDs for selectable holiday color schemes
US7102301B2 (en) 2002-05-10 2006-09-05 Frank Joseph Oskorep Year-round decorative lights with selectable holiday color schemes
US7131748B2 (en) 2002-10-03 2006-11-07 Year-Round Creations, Llc Decorative lights with addressable color-controllable LED nodes and control circuitry, and method
US7139617B1 (en) 1999-07-14 2006-11-21 Color Kinetics Incorporated Systems and methods for authoring lighting sequences
US7175302B2 (en) 2002-05-10 2007-02-13 Year-Round Creations, Llc Year-round decorative lights with multiple strings of series-coupled bipolar bicolor LEDs for selectable holiday color schemes
US7202607B2 (en) 2004-01-23 2007-04-10 Year-Round Creations, Llc Year-round decorative lights with time-multiplexed illumination of interleaved sets of color-controllable LEDS
US7233831B2 (en) 1999-07-14 2007-06-19 Color Kinetics Incorporated Systems and methods for controlling programmable lighting systems
US7257551B2 (en) 2002-05-10 2007-08-14 Year-Round Creations, Llc Year-round decorative lights with selectable holiday color schemes and associated methods
WO2007121569A1 (en) * 2006-04-21 2007-11-01 Tir Technology Lp Solid-state lighting network and protocol
US7353071B2 (en) 1999-07-14 2008-04-01 Philips Solid-State Lighting Solutions, Inc. Method and apparatus for authoring and playing back lighting sequences
US7473008B2 (en) 2003-12-15 2009-01-06 Orbital Technologies, Inc. Marine LED lighting system and method
US8562186B2 (en) 2002-02-27 2013-10-22 Winvic Sales Inc. Electrically illuminated flame simulator
WO2014028156A1 (en) * 2012-08-15 2014-02-20 Children Oral Care, Llc Illuminated multi-light flashing toothbrush and method of use
US8810417B2 (en) 2009-08-28 2014-08-19 The Invention Science Fund I, Llc Beverage immersate with detection capability
US8807785B2 (en) 2008-05-23 2014-08-19 Ilumisys, Inc. Electric shock resistant L.E.D. based light
US8840282B2 (en) 2010-03-26 2014-09-23 Ilumisys, Inc. LED bulb with internal heat dissipating structures
US8866396B2 (en) 2000-02-11 2014-10-21 Ilumisys, Inc. Light tube and power supply circuit
US8870415B2 (en) 2010-12-09 2014-10-28 Ilumisys, Inc. LED fluorescent tube replacement light with reduced shock hazard
US8894430B2 (en) 2010-10-29 2014-11-25 Ilumisys, Inc. Mechanisms for reducing risk of shock during installation of light tube
US8901823B2 (en) 2008-10-24 2014-12-02 Ilumisys, Inc. Light and light sensor
US8928025B2 (en) 2007-12-20 2015-01-06 Ilumisys, Inc. LED lighting apparatus with swivel connection
US8946996B2 (en) 2008-10-24 2015-02-03 Ilumisys, Inc. Light and light sensor
US9013119B2 (en) 2010-03-26 2015-04-21 Ilumisys, Inc. LED light with thermoelectric generator
US9024543B2 (en) 2008-10-17 2015-05-05 Koninklijkle Philips N.V. Method and apparatus for controlling an illumination system in a temperature controlled environment
US9024766B2 (en) 2009-08-28 2015-05-05 The Invention Science Fund, Llc Beverage containers with detection capability
US9057493B2 (en) 2010-03-26 2015-06-16 Ilumisys, Inc. LED light tube with dual sided light distribution
US9072171B2 (en) 2011-08-24 2015-06-30 Ilumisys, Inc. Circuit board mount for LED light
US9084314B2 (en) 2006-11-28 2015-07-14 Hayward Industries, Inc. Programmable underwater lighting system
US9101026B2 (en) 2008-10-24 2015-08-04 Ilumisys, Inc. Integration of LED lighting with building controls
US9097957B2 (en) 2001-09-07 2015-08-04 Litepanels, Ltd Versatile lighting apparatus and associated kit
US9134599B2 (en) 2012-08-01 2015-09-15 Pentair Water Pool And Spa, Inc. Underwater image projection controller with boundary setting and image correction modules and interface and method of using same
US9163794B2 (en) 2012-07-06 2015-10-20 Ilumisys, Inc. Power supply assembly for LED-based light tube
US9184518B2 (en) 2012-03-02 2015-11-10 Ilumisys, Inc. Electrical connector header for an LED-based light
US9271367B2 (en) 2012-07-09 2016-02-23 Ilumisys, Inc. System and method for controlling operation of an LED-based light
US9267650B2 (en) 2013-10-09 2016-02-23 Ilumisys, Inc. Lens for an LED-based light
US9285084B2 (en) 2013-03-14 2016-03-15 Ilumisys, Inc. Diffusers for LED-based lights
US9353939B2 (en) 2008-10-24 2016-05-31 iLumisys, Inc Lighting including integral communication apparatus
US9423608B2 (en) 2012-08-01 2016-08-23 Pentair Water Pool And Spa, Inc. Multidimensional rotary motion apparatus moving a reflective surface and method of operating same
US9510400B2 (en) 2014-05-13 2016-11-29 Ilumisys, Inc. User input systems for an LED-based light
US9574717B2 (en) 2014-01-22 2017-02-21 Ilumisys, Inc. LED-based light with addressed LEDs
US20170213451A1 (en) 2016-01-22 2017-07-27 Hayward Industries, Inc. Systems and Methods for Providing Network Connectivity and Remote Monitoring, Optimization, and Control of Pool/Spa Equipment
GB2547643A (en) * 2016-02-29 2017-08-30 Ping Lai Chung Modeling illumination device
WO2018009364A1 (en) * 2016-07-06 2018-01-11 Illumix Surgical Canada Inc. Illuminating surgical device and control element
US10161568B2 (en) 2015-06-01 2018-12-25 Ilumisys, Inc. LED-based light with canted outer walls
US10176689B2 (en) 2008-10-24 2019-01-08 Ilumisys, Inc. Integration of led lighting control with emergency notification systems
CN109300337A (en) * 2018-11-15 2019-02-01 赤峰学院 LED pattern generator
CN109445232A (en) * 2018-12-28 2019-03-08 厦门大学嘉庚学院 A kind of camera flashing light HUB device and its working method
US10718507B2 (en) 2010-04-28 2020-07-21 Hayard Industries, Inc. Underwater light having a sealed polymer housing and method of manufacture therefor
US20200319621A1 (en) 2016-01-22 2020-10-08 Hayward Industries, Inc. Systems and Methods for Providing Network Connectivity and Remote Monitoring, Optimization, and Control of Pool/Spa Equipment
CN112256102A (en) * 2020-10-23 2021-01-22 贵州百胜工程建设咨询有限公司 Multi-source multi-scene data access system for civil building
US10976713B2 (en) 2013-03-15 2021-04-13 Hayward Industries, Inc. Modular pool/spa control system
US11168876B2 (en) 2019-03-06 2021-11-09 Hayward Industries, Inc. Underwater light having programmable controller and replaceable light-emitting diode (LED) assembly
CN114724494A (en) * 2020-12-22 2022-07-08 酷矽半导体科技(上海)有限公司 Display screen, display algorithm, display data processing method and current adjusting method

Families Citing this family (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
DE102017121386A1 (en) * 2017-09-14 2019-03-14 Motherson Innovations Company Limited Spherical illuminant and display device
WO2022084152A1 (en) * 2020-10-20 2022-04-28 Signify Holding B.V. Adaptive track system comprising track lights and track ionizers for customized lighting and disinfection

Citations (5)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
GB2176042A (en) * 1985-05-28 1986-12-10 Integrated Systems Eng Solid state color display system and light emitting diode pixels therefore
US4887074A (en) * 1988-01-20 1989-12-12 Michael Simon Light-emitting diode display system
FR2640791A2 (en) * 1987-11-05 1990-06-22 Cheng Eric Dot-matrix, light-emitting-diode display for construction of a large dot-matrix, light-emitting-diode display assembly
US5410328A (en) * 1994-03-28 1995-04-25 Trans-Lux Corporation Replaceable intelligent pixel module for large-scale LED displays
US5420482A (en) * 1993-02-11 1995-05-30 Phares; Louis A. Controlled lighting system

Family Cites Families (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US4607317A (en) * 1984-08-14 1986-08-19 Lin Ta Yeh Non-neon light

Patent Citations (5)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
GB2176042A (en) * 1985-05-28 1986-12-10 Integrated Systems Eng Solid state color display system and light emitting diode pixels therefore
FR2640791A2 (en) * 1987-11-05 1990-06-22 Cheng Eric Dot-matrix, light-emitting-diode display for construction of a large dot-matrix, light-emitting-diode display assembly
US4887074A (en) * 1988-01-20 1989-12-12 Michael Simon Light-emitting diode display system
US5420482A (en) * 1993-02-11 1995-05-30 Phares; Louis A. Controlled lighting system
US5410328A (en) * 1994-03-28 1995-04-25 Trans-Lux Corporation Replaceable intelligent pixel module for large-scale LED displays

Non-Patent Citations (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Title
See also references of EP1040398A2 *

Cited By (138)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2001003103A1 (en) * 1999-07-06 2001-01-11 Denton Douglas Wilmot An activity monitoring device
US7139617B1 (en) 1999-07-14 2006-11-21 Color Kinetics Incorporated Systems and methods for authoring lighting sequences
WO2001005195A1 (en) * 1999-07-14 2001-01-18 Color Kinetics Incorporated Systems and methods for authoring lighting sequences
US7353071B2 (en) 1999-07-14 2008-04-01 Philips Solid-State Lighting Solutions, Inc. Method and apparatus for authoring and playing back lighting sequences
US7233831B2 (en) 1999-07-14 2007-06-19 Color Kinetics Incorporated Systems and methods for controlling programmable lighting systems
EP1258174A1 (en) * 1999-11-30 2002-11-20 Polaris Pool Systems, Inc. A multicolor led lamp bulb for underwater pool lights
EP1258174A4 (en) * 1999-11-30 2004-07-14 Polaris Pool Sys Inc A multicolor led lamp bulb for underwater pool lights
CN100386000C (en) * 1999-12-28 2008-04-30 埃维克斯公司 Light modulating LED lighting apparatus
EP1113709A3 (en) * 1999-12-28 2003-10-15 Avix Inc. Light control for led lighting equipment
EP1113709A2 (en) * 1999-12-28 2001-07-04 Avix Inc. Light control for led lighting equipment
EP1113215A3 (en) * 1999-12-29 2002-10-09 Spx Corporation Multi-colored industrial signal device
US9739428B1 (en) 2000-02-11 2017-08-22 Ilumisys, Inc. Light tube and power supply circuit
US9416923B1 (en) 2000-02-11 2016-08-16 Ilumisys, Inc. Light tube and power supply circuit
US9752736B2 (en) 2000-02-11 2017-09-05 Ilumisys, Inc. Light tube and power supply circuit
US8866396B2 (en) 2000-02-11 2014-10-21 Ilumisys, Inc. Light tube and power supply circuit
US9759392B2 (en) 2000-02-11 2017-09-12 Ilumisys, Inc. Light tube and power supply circuit
US9777893B2 (en) 2000-02-11 2017-10-03 Ilumisys, Inc. Light tube and power supply circuit
US8870412B1 (en) 2000-02-11 2014-10-28 Ilumisys, Inc. Light tube and power supply circuit
US9803806B2 (en) 2000-02-11 2017-10-31 Ilumisys, Inc. Light tube and power supply circuit
US9970601B2 (en) 2000-02-11 2018-05-15 Ilumisys, Inc. Light tube and power supply circuit
US9006993B1 (en) 2000-02-11 2015-04-14 Ilumisys, Inc. Light tube and power supply circuit
US9006990B1 (en) 2000-02-11 2015-04-14 Ilumisys, Inc. Light tube and power supply circuit
US9746139B2 (en) 2000-02-11 2017-08-29 Ilumisys, Inc. Light tube and power supply circuit
US10054270B2 (en) 2000-02-11 2018-08-21 Ilumisys, Inc. Light tube and power supply circuit
US10557593B2 (en) 2000-02-11 2020-02-11 Ilumisys, Inc. Light tube and power supply circuit
US9222626B1 (en) 2000-02-11 2015-12-29 Ilumisys, Inc. Light tube and power supply circuit
JP2001307505A (en) * 2000-04-19 2001-11-02 Matsushita Electric Ind Co Ltd Tube bulb and lighting equipment
JP2003531467A (en) * 2000-04-24 2003-10-21 カラー・キネティックス・インコーポレーテッド Light emitting diode based products
JP2014112547A (en) * 2000-04-24 2014-06-19 Philips Solid-State Lighting Solutions Inc Light-emitting diode-based product
EP1152642A2 (en) * 2000-04-27 2001-11-07 Agilent Technologies, Inc. (a Delaware corporation) Method and apparatus for measuring spectral content of LED light source and control thereof
EP1152642A3 (en) * 2000-04-27 2003-10-29 Agilent Technologies, Inc. (a Delaware corporation) Method and apparatus for measuring spectral content of LED light source and control thereof
US6909377B2 (en) 2000-06-27 2005-06-21 Arnold & Richter Cine Technik Gmbh & Co. Betriebs Kg Illumination device with light emitting diodes (LEDs), method of illumination and method for image recording with such an LED illumination device
WO2002011553A2 (en) * 2000-08-04 2002-02-14 Pearl Technology Holdings, Llc Fiber optic candy
WO2002011553A3 (en) * 2000-08-04 2002-05-30 Pearl Technology Holdings Llc Fiber optic candy
US9097957B2 (en) 2001-09-07 2015-08-04 Litepanels, Ltd Versatile lighting apparatus and associated kit
US8858043B2 (en) 2002-02-27 2014-10-14 Winvic Sales Inc. Electrically illuminated flame simulator
US9491832B2 (en) 2002-02-27 2016-11-08 Nii Northern International Inc. Electrically illuminated flame simulator
US10247374B2 (en) 2002-02-27 2019-04-02 Sterno Home Inc. Electrically illuminated flame simulator
US10036521B2 (en) 2002-02-27 2018-07-31 Sterno Home Inc. Electrically illuminated flame simulator
US8998461B2 (en) 2002-02-27 2015-04-07 Winvic Sales Inc. Electrically illuminated flame simulator
US8562186B2 (en) 2002-02-27 2013-10-22 Winvic Sales Inc. Electrically illuminated flame simulator
US6683423B2 (en) 2002-04-08 2004-01-27 David W. Cunningham Lighting apparatus for producing a beam of light having a controlled luminous flux spectrum
US7102301B2 (en) 2002-05-10 2006-09-05 Frank Joseph Oskorep Year-round decorative lights with selectable holiday color schemes
US6933680B2 (en) 2002-05-10 2005-08-23 Frank Joseph Oskorep Decorative lights with at least one commonly controlled set of color-controllable multi-color LEDs for selectable holiday color schemes
US7175302B2 (en) 2002-05-10 2007-02-13 Year-Round Creations, Llc Year-round decorative lights with multiple strings of series-coupled bipolar bicolor LEDs for selectable holiday color schemes
US7257551B2 (en) 2002-05-10 2007-08-14 Year-Round Creations, Llc Year-round decorative lights with selectable holiday color schemes and associated methods
US6787999B2 (en) 2002-10-03 2004-09-07 Gelcore, Llc LED-based modular lamp
WO2004034748A1 (en) * 2002-10-03 2004-04-22 Gelcore Llc Led-based modular lamp
US7131748B2 (en) 2002-10-03 2006-11-07 Year-Round Creations, Llc Decorative lights with addressable color-controllable LED nodes and control circuitry, and method
US6902299B2 (en) 2003-02-27 2005-06-07 Cantronic Systems Inc. Long distance illuminator
US7473008B2 (en) 2003-12-15 2009-01-06 Orbital Technologies, Inc. Marine LED lighting system and method
US7845814B2 (en) 2003-12-15 2010-12-07 Orbital Technologies Corporation Marine LED lighting system and method
US7878674B2 (en) 2003-12-15 2011-02-01 Orbital Technologies Corporation Marine LED lighting system and method
US8858012B2 (en) 2003-12-15 2014-10-14 Orbital Technologies, Inc. Marine LED lighting system and method
US8388163B2 (en) 2003-12-15 2013-03-05 Orbital Technologies Corporation Marine LED lighting system and method
US7202607B2 (en) 2004-01-23 2007-04-10 Year-Round Creations, Llc Year-round decorative lights with time-multiplexed illumination of interleaved sets of color-controllable LEDS
WO2007121569A1 (en) * 2006-04-21 2007-11-01 Tir Technology Lp Solid-state lighting network and protocol
US9084314B2 (en) 2006-11-28 2015-07-14 Hayward Industries, Inc. Programmable underwater lighting system
US8928025B2 (en) 2007-12-20 2015-01-06 Ilumisys, Inc. LED lighting apparatus with swivel connection
US8807785B2 (en) 2008-05-23 2014-08-19 Ilumisys, Inc. Electric shock resistant L.E.D. based light
US9024543B2 (en) 2008-10-17 2015-05-05 Koninklijkle Philips N.V. Method and apparatus for controlling an illumination system in a temperature controlled environment
US8946996B2 (en) 2008-10-24 2015-02-03 Ilumisys, Inc. Light and light sensor
US10036549B2 (en) 2008-10-24 2018-07-31 Ilumisys, Inc. Lighting including integral communication apparatus
US10560992B2 (en) 2008-10-24 2020-02-11 Ilumisys, Inc. Light and light sensor
US10182480B2 (en) 2008-10-24 2019-01-15 Ilumisys, Inc. Light and light sensor
US10176689B2 (en) 2008-10-24 2019-01-08 Ilumisys, Inc. Integration of led lighting control with emergency notification systems
US10342086B2 (en) 2008-10-24 2019-07-02 Ilumisys, Inc. Integration of LED lighting with building controls
US9353939B2 (en) 2008-10-24 2016-05-31 iLumisys, Inc Lighting including integral communication apparatus
US10713915B2 (en) 2008-10-24 2020-07-14 Ilumisys, Inc. Integration of LED lighting control with emergency notification systems
US9101026B2 (en) 2008-10-24 2015-08-04 Ilumisys, Inc. Integration of LED lighting with building controls
US9398661B2 (en) 2008-10-24 2016-07-19 Ilumisys, Inc. Light and light sensor
US11073275B2 (en) 2008-10-24 2021-07-27 Ilumisys, Inc. Lighting including integral communication apparatus
US10571115B2 (en) 2008-10-24 2020-02-25 Ilumisys, Inc. Lighting including integral communication apparatus
US8901823B2 (en) 2008-10-24 2014-12-02 Ilumisys, Inc. Light and light sensor
US10932339B2 (en) 2008-10-24 2021-02-23 Ilumisys, Inc. Light and light sensor
US11333308B2 (en) 2008-10-24 2022-05-17 Ilumisys, Inc. Light and light sensor
US10973094B2 (en) 2008-10-24 2021-04-06 Ilumisys, Inc. Integration of LED lighting with building controls
US9585216B2 (en) 2008-10-24 2017-02-28 Ilumisys, Inc. Integration of LED lighting with building controls
US9635727B2 (en) 2008-10-24 2017-04-25 Ilumisys, Inc. Light and light sensor
US8898069B2 (en) 2009-08-28 2014-11-25 The Invention Science Fund I, Llc Devices and methods for detecting an analyte in salivary fluid
US8810417B2 (en) 2009-08-28 2014-08-19 The Invention Science Fund I, Llc Beverage immersate with detection capability
US9024766B2 (en) 2009-08-28 2015-05-05 The Invention Science Fund, Llc Beverage containers with detection capability
US9395075B2 (en) 2010-03-26 2016-07-19 Ilumisys, Inc. LED bulb for incandescent bulb replacement with internal heat dissipating structures
US9057493B2 (en) 2010-03-26 2015-06-16 Ilumisys, Inc. LED light tube with dual sided light distribution
US8840282B2 (en) 2010-03-26 2014-09-23 Ilumisys, Inc. LED bulb with internal heat dissipating structures
US9013119B2 (en) 2010-03-26 2015-04-21 Ilumisys, Inc. LED light with thermoelectric generator
US10718507B2 (en) 2010-04-28 2020-07-21 Hayard Industries, Inc. Underwater light having a sealed polymer housing and method of manufacture therefor
US8894430B2 (en) 2010-10-29 2014-11-25 Ilumisys, Inc. Mechanisms for reducing risk of shock during installation of light tube
US8870415B2 (en) 2010-12-09 2014-10-28 Ilumisys, Inc. LED fluorescent tube replacement light with reduced shock hazard
US9072171B2 (en) 2011-08-24 2015-06-30 Ilumisys, Inc. Circuit board mount for LED light
US9184518B2 (en) 2012-03-02 2015-11-10 Ilumisys, Inc. Electrical connector header for an LED-based light
US9163794B2 (en) 2012-07-06 2015-10-20 Ilumisys, Inc. Power supply assembly for LED-based light tube
US9807842B2 (en) 2012-07-09 2017-10-31 Ilumisys, Inc. System and method for controlling operation of an LED-based light
US9271367B2 (en) 2012-07-09 2016-02-23 Ilumisys, Inc. System and method for controlling operation of an LED-based light
US10966295B2 (en) 2012-07-09 2021-03-30 Ilumisys, Inc. System and method for controlling operation of an LED-based light
US9813684B2 (en) 2012-08-01 2017-11-07 Pentair Water Pool And Spa, Inc. Underwater image projection system and method
US10469811B2 (en) 2012-08-01 2019-11-05 Pentair Water Pool And Spa, Inc. Underwater image projection system and method
US9360746B2 (en) 2012-08-01 2016-06-07 Pentair Water Pool And Spa, Inc. Underwater image projection system and method
US9423608B2 (en) 2012-08-01 2016-08-23 Pentair Water Pool And Spa, Inc. Multidimensional rotary motion apparatus moving a reflective surface and method of operating same
US10187619B2 (en) 2012-08-01 2019-01-22 Pentair Water Pool And Spa, Inc. Underwater image projection system and method
US9983400B2 (en) 2012-08-01 2018-05-29 Pentair Water Pool And Spa, Inc. Multidimensional rotary motion apparatus moving a reflective surface and method of operating same
US9435997B2 (en) 2012-08-01 2016-09-06 Pentair Water Pool And Spa, Inc. Multidimensional rotary motion apparatus moving a reflective surface and method of operating same
US10302935B2 (en) 2012-08-01 2019-05-28 Pentair Water Pool And Spa, Inc. Multidimensional rotary motion apparatus moving a reflective surface and method of operating same
US9134599B2 (en) 2012-08-01 2015-09-15 Pentair Water Pool And Spa, Inc. Underwater image projection controller with boundary setting and image correction modules and interface and method of using same
US10004324B2 (en) 2012-08-15 2018-06-26 Children Oral Care, Llc Illuminated multi-light flashing toothbrush and method of use
WO2014028156A1 (en) * 2012-08-15 2014-02-20 Children Oral Care, Llc Illuminated multi-light flashing toothbrush and method of use
US9285084B2 (en) 2013-03-14 2016-03-15 Ilumisys, Inc. Diffusers for LED-based lights
US10976713B2 (en) 2013-03-15 2021-04-13 Hayward Industries, Inc. Modular pool/spa control system
US11822300B2 (en) 2013-03-15 2023-11-21 Hayward Industries, Inc. Modular pool/spa control system
US9267650B2 (en) 2013-10-09 2016-02-23 Ilumisys, Inc. Lens for an LED-based light
US9574717B2 (en) 2014-01-22 2017-02-21 Ilumisys, Inc. LED-based light with addressed LEDs
US10260686B2 (en) 2014-01-22 2019-04-16 Ilumisys, Inc. LED-based light with addressed LEDs
US9510400B2 (en) 2014-05-13 2016-11-29 Ilumisys, Inc. User input systems for an LED-based light
US11428370B2 (en) 2015-06-01 2022-08-30 Ilumisys, Inc. LED-based light with canted outer walls
US10161568B2 (en) 2015-06-01 2018-12-25 Ilumisys, Inc. LED-based light with canted outer walls
US10690296B2 (en) 2015-06-01 2020-06-23 Ilumisys, Inc. LED-based light with canted outer walls
US11028972B2 (en) 2015-06-01 2021-06-08 Ilumisys, Inc. LED-based light with canted outer walls
US11122669B2 (en) 2016-01-22 2021-09-14 Hayward Industries, Inc. Systems and methods for providing network connectivity and remote monitoring, optimization, and control of pool/spa equipment
US11720085B2 (en) 2016-01-22 2023-08-08 Hayward Industries, Inc. Systems and methods for providing network connectivity and remote monitoring, optimization, and control of pool/spa equipment
US20170213451A1 (en) 2016-01-22 2017-07-27 Hayward Industries, Inc. Systems and Methods for Providing Network Connectivity and Remote Monitoring, Optimization, and Control of Pool/Spa Equipment
US10363197B2 (en) 2016-01-22 2019-07-30 Hayward Industries, Inc. Systems and methods for providing network connectivity and remote monitoring, optimization, and control of pool/spa equipment
US10272014B2 (en) 2016-01-22 2019-04-30 Hayward Industries, Inc. Systems and methods for providing network connectivity and remote monitoring, optimization, and control of pool/spa equipment
US11000449B2 (en) 2016-01-22 2021-05-11 Hayward Industries, Inc. Systems and methods for providing network connectivity and remote monitoring, optimization, and control of pool/spa equipment
US20200319621A1 (en) 2016-01-22 2020-10-08 Hayward Industries, Inc. Systems and Methods for Providing Network Connectivity and Remote Monitoring, Optimization, and Control of Pool/Spa Equipment
US10219975B2 (en) 2016-01-22 2019-03-05 Hayward Industries, Inc. Systems and methods for providing network connectivity and remote monitoring, optimization, and control of pool/spa equipment
US11096862B2 (en) 2016-01-22 2021-08-24 Hayward Industries, Inc. Systems and methods for providing network connectivity and remote monitoring, optimization, and control of pool/spa equipment
US11129256B2 (en) 2016-01-22 2021-09-21 Hayward Industries, Inc. Systems and methods for providing network connectivity and remote monitoring, optimization, and control of pool/spa equipment
GB2547643A (en) * 2016-02-29 2017-08-30 Ping Lai Chung Modeling illumination device
WO2018009364A1 (en) * 2016-07-06 2018-01-11 Illumix Surgical Canada Inc. Illuminating surgical device and control element
CN109300337A (en) * 2018-11-15 2019-02-01 赤峰学院 LED pattern generator
CN109445232A (en) * 2018-12-28 2019-03-08 厦门大学嘉庚学院 A kind of camera flashing light HUB device and its working method
CN109445232B (en) * 2018-12-28 2023-06-23 厦门大学嘉庚学院 Novel camera flash HUB device and working method thereof
US11168876B2 (en) 2019-03-06 2021-11-09 Hayward Industries, Inc. Underwater light having programmable controller and replaceable light-emitting diode (LED) assembly
US11754268B2 (en) 2019-03-06 2023-09-12 Hayward Industries, Inc. Underwater light having programmable controller and replaceable light-emitting diode (LED) assembly
CN112256102A (en) * 2020-10-23 2021-01-22 贵州百胜工程建设咨询有限公司 Multi-source multi-scene data access system for civil building
CN112256102B (en) * 2020-10-23 2024-01-30 贵州百胜数源工程技术管理有限公司 Multi-source multi-scene data access system for civil building
CN114724494A (en) * 2020-12-22 2022-07-08 酷矽半导体科技(上海)有限公司 Display screen, display algorithm, display data processing method and current adjusting method
CN114724494B (en) * 2020-12-22 2023-08-18 酷矽半导体科技(上海)有限公司 Display screen, display algorithm, display data processing method and current adjusting method

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
EP1040398B1 (en) 2018-02-21
EP1040398A2 (en) 2000-10-04
AU1924199A (en) 1999-07-05
WO1999031560A3 (en) 1999-09-02
ES2666995T3 (en) 2018-05-09
WO1999031560A8 (en) 1999-10-07

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
US6459919B1 (en) Precision illumination methods and systems
US6166496A (en) Lighting entertainment system
US6720745B2 (en) Data delivery track
US6528954B1 (en) Smart light bulb
US7525254B2 (en) Vehicle lighting methods and apparatus
US6211626B1 (en) Illumination components
US6292901B1 (en) Power/data protocol
US6577080B2 (en) Lighting entertainment system
US7180252B2 (en) Geometric panel lighting apparatus and methods
US7598686B2 (en) Organic light emitting diode methods and apparatus
EP1040398B1 (en) Digitally controlled illumination methods and systems
US7352339B2 (en) Diffuse illumination systems and methods
CA2314163C (en) Digitally controlled illumination methods and systems
AU2007216901B2 (en) Digitally controlled illumination methods and systems
AU2004200183B2 (en) Digitally controlled illumination methods and systems

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
AK Designated states

Kind code of ref document: A2

Designated state(s): AL AM AT AU AZ BA BB BG BR BY CA CH CN CU CZ DE DK EE ES FI GB GE GH GM HR HU ID IL IS JP KE KG KP KR KZ LC LK LR LS LT LU LV MD MG MK MN MW MX NO NZ PL PT RO RU SD SE SG SI SK SL TJ TM TR TT UA UG UZ VN YU ZW

AL Designated countries for regional patents

Kind code of ref document: A2

Designated state(s): GH GM KE LS MW SD SZ UG ZW AM AZ BY KG KZ MD RU TJ TM AT BE CH CY DE DK ES FI FR GB GR IE IT LU MC NL PT SE BF BJ CF CG CI CM GA GN GW ML MR NE SN TD TG

DFPE Request for preliminary examination filed prior to expiration of 19th month from priority date (pct application filed before 20040101)
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application
DFPE Request for preliminary examination filed prior to expiration of 19th month from priority date (pct application filed before 20040101)

Free format text: (EXCEPT IN)

AK Designated states

Kind code of ref document: A3

Designated state(s): AL AM AT AU AZ BA BB BG BR BY CA CH CN CU CZ DE DK EE ES FI GB GE GH GM HR HU ID IL IN IS JP KE KG KP KR KZ LC LK LR LS LT LU LV MD MG MK MN MW MX NO NZ PL PT RO RU SD SE SG SI SK SL TJ TM TR TT UA UG UZ VN YU ZW

AL Designated countries for regional patents

Kind code of ref document: A3

Designated state(s): GH GM KE LS MW SD SZ UG ZW AM AZ BY KG KZ MD RU TJ TM AT BE CH CY DE DK ES FI FR GB GR IE IT LU MC NL PT SE BF BJ CF CG CI CM GA GN GW ML MR NE SN TD TG

AK Designated states

Kind code of ref document: C1

Designated state(s): AL AM AT AU AZ BA BB BG BR BY CA CH CN CU CZ DE DK EE ES FI GB GE GH GM HR HU ID IL IN IS JP KE KG KP KR KZ LC LK LR LS LT LU LV MD MG MK MN MW MX NO NZ PL PT RO RU SD SE SG SI SK SL TJ TM TR TT UA UG UZ VN YU ZW

AL Designated countries for regional patents

Kind code of ref document: C1

Designated state(s): GH GM KE LS MW SD SZ UG ZW AM AZ BY KG KZ MD RU TJ TM AT BE CH CY DE DK ES FI FR GB GR IE IT LU MC NL PT SE BF BJ CF CG CI CM GA GN GW ML MR NE SN TD TG

CFP Corrected version of a pamphlet front page
CR1 Correction of entry in section i

Free format text: PAT. BUL. 25/99 UNDER (81) ADD "IN"; DUE TO LATE TRANSMITTAL BY THE RECEIVING OFFICE

ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 2314163

Country of ref document: CA

Ref country code: CA

Ref document number: 2314163

Kind code of ref document: A

Format of ref document f/p: F

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 1998964035

Country of ref document: EP

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: KR

ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref country code: JP

Ref document number: 2000 539392

Kind code of ref document: A

Format of ref document f/p: F

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 19241/99

Country of ref document: AU

WWP Wipo information: published in national office

Ref document number: 1998964035

Country of ref document: EP

REG Reference to national code

Ref country code: DE

Ref legal event code: 8642